Technics Musical Instrument SX PR54 M User Manual

DIGITAL ENSEMBLE

SX-PR54/M

Operating Instructions

Before connecting, operating or adjusting this product, please read these

instructions completely. Please keep this manual for future reference.

This manual was printed

with soy based ink.

ENGLISH

QQTG0701

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

THE FOLLOWING APPLIES ONLY

IN THE U.S.A. AND CANADA

THE FOLLOWING APPLIES

ONLY IN THE U.S.A.

CAUTION:

This equipment has been tested and found to

comply with the limits for a Class B digital device,

pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits

are designed to provide reasonable protection

against harmful interference in a residential instal-

lation. This equipment generates, uses and can

radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed

and used in accordance with the instructions, may

cause harmful interference to radio communica-

tions. However, there is no guarantee that interfer-

ence will not occur in a particular installation. If this

equipment does cause harmful interference to radio

or television reception, which can be determined by

turning the equipment off and on, the user is

encouraged to try to correct the interference by one

or more of the following measures:

CAUTION

RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK

DO NOT OPEN

CAUTION:

TO REDUCE THE RISK OF

ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT

REMOVE SCREWS.

NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS

INSIDE.

REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED

SERVICE PERSONNEL.

The lightning flash with arrowhead

symbol, within an equilateral tri-

angle, is intended to alert the user

to the presence of uninsulated

“dangerous voltage” within the pro-

duct’s enclosure that may be of

sufficient magnitude to constitute a

risk of electric shock to persons.

• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.

• Increase the separation between the equipment

and receiver.

• Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit

different from that to which the receiver is con-

nected.

The exclamation point within an

equilateral triangle is intended to

alert the user to the presence of

important operating and main-

tenance (servicing) instructions in

the literature accompanying the

appliance.

• Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV

technician for help.

FCC Warning:

To assure continued FCC emission limit compli-

ance, use only the provided power supply cord and

the shielded interface cable when connecting this

device to the computer.

(for U.S.A. and Canada)

Also, any unauthorized changes or modifications to

this equipment would void the user’s authority to

operate this device.

CAUTION:

TO PREVENT ELECTRIC SHOCK MATCH WIDE

BLADE OF PLUG TO WIDE SLOT, FULLY IN-

SERT.

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC

Rules. Operation is subject to the following two con-

ditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful inter-

ference, and (2) this device must accept any

interference received, including interference that

may cause undesired operation.

WARNING:

TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE, ELECTRIC

SHOCK OR PRODUCT DAMAGE, DO NOT EXPOSE

THIS APPARATUS TO RAIN, MOISTURE, DRIP-

PING OR SPLASHING AND THAT NO OBJECTS

FILLED WITH LIQUIDS, SUCH AS VASES, SHALL

BE PLACED ON THE APPARATUS.

Responsible Party:

Matshshita Electric Corporation of America

One Panasonic Way

Secaucus, NJ, 07094 USA

Telephone No.: 1-800-211-7262

THE FOLLOWING APPLIES ONLY IN THE U.S.A.

The model number and serial number are found

underneath the keyboard.

Please note the model and serial numbers in the

space provided below and retain this sheet as a

permanent record of your purchase to aid identification

in the event of theft.

Notice:

This product has a fluorescent lamp that contains a

small amount of mercury.

It also contains lead in some components. Disposal of

these materials may be regulated in your community

due to environmental considerations.

MODEL NUMBER

For disposal or recycling information please contact

your local authorities, or the Electronics Industries

Alliance: <http://www.eiae.org>

SERIAL NUMBER

THIS UNIT IS INTENDED FOR USE IN TROPICAL CLIMATES.

DENNA ENHET ÄR AVSEDD FÖR ANVÄNDNING PÅ PLATSER MED TROPISKT KLIMAT.

TÄMÄ LAITE ON TARKOITETTU KÄYTETTÄVÄKSI TROOPPISESSA ILMASTOSSA.

DETTE APPARATET ER BEREGNET TIL BRUK UNDER TROPISKE KLIMAFORHOLD.

QQTG0701

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

QQTG0701

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

QQTG0701

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

THE FOLLOWING APPLIES ONLY IN THE U.S.A.

IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

Read these operating instructions carefully before using the unit. Follow the safety instructions on the unit and the

safety precautions listed below. Keep these operating instructions handy for future reference.

6.Carts and stands—Use the unit only

Safety

with carts and stands recommended by

1.Power Source—Connect the unit to a power

source of the type described in these instructions or

as marked on the unit.

the manufacturer. Move carts with care.

Sudden stops, excessive force, and

uneven surfaces can cause carts to

overturn.

2.Polarization—The unit is equipped with a polarized

power plug where one blade is wider than the other.

This safety feature ensures that the plug fits into

your household AC outlet only one way. If the plug

doesn’t fit one way, try reversing it. If the plug still

doesn’t fit, contact an electrician to replace the

obsolete outlet. Do not attempt to defeat the safety

purpose of the plug.

3.Power Cord protection—Route the AC power sup-

ply cord so that it will not be walked on or pinched

by items placed on or against it. Never take hold of

the plug or cord with wet hands. Always grasp the

plug body firmly when connecting and disconnect-

ing it.

7.Wall and ceiling mounting—Do not mount the unit

on walls or ceilings unless specified in the instruc-

tions.

Environment

1.Water and moisture—Do not use the unit near

water, such as near a bathtub or swimming pool.

Avoid damp basements.

2.Heat—Situate the unit away from heat sources,

such as radiators.

Do not situate where temperatures fall below 5°C

(41°F) or rise above 35°C (95°F).

4.Overloading—When connecting the AC power

supply cord, be careful not to overload the house-

hold AC outlet, extension cord, or outlet from any

other device as this can result in fire or electric

shock.

5.Nonuse periods—Turn the unit off when it is not in

use. Unplug the unit from the household AC outlet if

it is not to be used for a long time. Unplug the unit

during lightning storms.

Maintenance

(See page 7 for details.)

Unplug the unit from the household AC outlet before

cleaning.

Clean with a damp cloth.

Do not use abrasive pads, scouring powders, or sol-

vents.

6.Attachments and accessories—Use only the

attachments and accessories recommended in

these operating instructions.

Service

1.Damage Requiring Service—The unit should be

serviced by qualified service personnel if:

(a) The AC power supply cord or the plug has been

damaged; or

Installation

(b) Objects or liquids have gotten into the unit; or

(d) The unit does not operate normally or exhibits a

marked change in performance; or

(e) The unit has been dropped or the cabinet dam-

aged.

Placement

1.Ventilation—Situate the unit so that it receives

proper ventilation. Do not install in a confined space

such as a bookcase or cabinet. Allow at least 10 cm

(4 inches) clearance from the rear of the unit. To

prevent the risk of electric shock or fire due to over-

heating ensure curtains and other materials do not

obstruct the unit’s ventilation.

2.Foreign material—Ensure objects and liquids do

not get into the unit. Avoid exposing the unit to

excessive smoke, dust, mechanical vibration, and

shock.

2.Servicing—Do not attempt to service the unit

beyond that described in these operating instruc-

tions. Refer all other servicing to authorized servic-

ing personnel.

3.Replacement parts—When parts need replacing

ensure the servicer uses parts specified by the

manufacturer or parts that have the same charac-

teristics as the original parts. Unauthorized substi-

tutes may result in fire, electric shock, or other

hazards.

3.Magnetism—Situate the unit away from equipment

and devices that generate strong magnetic fields.

4.Stacking—Do not place heavy objects on top of

this unit.

4.Safety check—After repairs or service, ask the ser-

vicer to perform safety checks to confirm that the

unit is in proper working condition.

5.Surface—Place the unit on a flat, level surface.

QQTG0701

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Cautions for safest use of this unit

Installation location

If operation seems abnormal

Immediately turn off the power, disconnect the power

cord plug from the electrical outlet, and contact the

store where it was purchased.

1. A well-ventilated place.

Take care not to use this unit in a place where it

will not receive sufficient ventilation, and not to

permit the ventilation holes to be covered by cur-

tains, or any similar materials.

Discontinue using the unit at once. Failure to do so

may result in additional damage or some other unex-

pected damage or accident.

• Because the power source is located inside the

unit, it is normal for the cabinet to become warm.

2. Place away from direct sunlight and excessive

heat from heating equipment.

3. A place where humidity, vibration and dust are

minimized.

A word about the power cord

Power source

If the power cord is scarred, is partially cut or

bronken, or has a bad contact, it may cause a fire or

serious electrical shock if used. NEVER use a dam-

aged power cord for any appliance. Moreover, the

power cord should never be forcibly bent.

1. Be sure the line voltage selector is in accordance

with local voltage in your area before connecting

the plug to the socket.

2. DC power cannot be used.

Handling the power cord

Don’t touch the inside parts of this

unit.

1. Never touch the power cord, or its plug, with wet

hands.

Some places inside this unit have high voltage poten-

tial. Never try to remove the top or back panels of this

unit, or to touch inside parts by hand or with tools.

2. Don’t pull the power cord.

Metal items inside the unit may

result in electric shock or damage.

Do not permit metal articles to get inside the unit.

Contact someone who is qualified in order to inspect

the inside, or to replace a fuse, if such becomes nec-

essary. Never attempt to do these things yourself.

Be especially careful with regard to this point if

children are near this unit. They should be warned

never to try to put anything inside.

Maintenance

The following suggestions will assist you in keeping

the unit in top condition.

• Be sure to switch the instrument off after use, and

do not switch the unit on and off in quick

succession, as this places an undue load on the

electronic components.

• To keep the luster of the surface and buttons, sim-

ply use a clean, damp cloth; polish with a soft, dry

cloth. Polish may be used but do not use thinners

or petro-chemical-based polishes.

If, nevertheless, some such article does get inside,

disconnect the power cord plug from the electrical

outlet, and contact the store where the unit was

purchased.

If water gets into the unit

Disconnect the power cord plug from the electrical

outlet, and contact the store where it was purchased.

• A wax-based polish may be used on the cabinet,

although you will find that rubbing with a soft cloth

will suffice.

As a precaution, it is suggested that flower vases and

other containers which hold liquids not be placed on

the top of this unit.

• This product may receive radio interference

caused by mobile telephones during use. If such

interference is apparent, please increase separa-

tion between the product and the mobile tele-

phone.

SVENSK: Det kan inträffa att den här produkten

under användningen tar emot radiostörningar,

orsakade av mobiltelefoner. Öka avståndet mellan

produkten och mobiltelefonen om störningarna är

uppenbara.

SERVICE MUST BE CARRIED OUT BY DEALER

OR OTHER QUALIFIED PERSON

QQTG0701

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Contents

Cautions for safest use of this unit ............................................................................................................. 7

Controls and functions............................................................................................................................... 10

BASIC FUNCTIONS

Getting started................................................................................................................................ 12

Playing the piano ............................................................................................................................ 13

Progressive Pianist......................................................................................................................... 14

See and listen to the demonstration ............................................................................................... 15

Select a sound................................................................................................................................ 16

Select the registration for a music style (PIANO STYLIST)............................................................ 17

Automatic panel settings (ONE TOUCH PLAY).............................................................................. 18

Record your performance (SEQUENCER)..................................................................................... 20

Store your panel settings (PANEL MEMORY) ................................................................................ 22

Save data on a floppy disk.............................................................................................................. 23

Load rhythm data from a Technics pattern disk (COMPOSER LOAD)........................................... 25

Play back commercial song disks (DIRECT PLAY) ........................................................................ 26

PRACTICAL APPLICATIONS

About the display ............................................................................................................................ 27

Favorites ......................................................................................................................................... 30

Part I Sounds and effects......................................................................................................................... 31

Overview of sounds ........................................................................................................................ 31

Selecting sounds ............................................................................................................................ 31

Assigning parts to the keyboard ..................................................................................................... 34

Pedals............................................................................................................................................. 35

Touch Sensitivity............................................................................................................................. 36

Effects............................................................................................................................................. 37

Transpose ....................................................................................................................................... 39

Techni-chord ................................................................................................................................... 40

Part II Playing the rhythm......................................................................................................................... 41

Overview of rhythm performance.................................................................................................... 41

Selecting rhythms ........................................................................................................................... 41

Playing the rhythm .......................................................................................................................... 43

Auto Play Chord.............................................................................................................................. 44

Fade In/Fade Out............................................................................................................................ 48

Sound Arranger .............................................................................................................................. 49

One Touch Play .............................................................................................................................. 49

Piano Stylist.................................................................................................................................... 50

Music Style Arranger ...................................................................................................................... 51

Panel Memory................................................................................................................................. 52

Part III Sequencer...................................................................................................................................... 54

Outline of the Sequencer................................................................................................................ 54

Sequencer parts ............................................................................................................................. 57

Easy Record................................................................................................................................... 58

Realtime Record............................................................................................................................. 59

Sequencer Play .............................................................................................................................. 61

Naming ........................................................................................................................................... 63

Panel Write ..................................................................................................................................... 63

Song Select .................................................................................................................................... 64

Punch Record................................................................................................................................. 64

Step Record.................................................................................................................................... 65

Track Assign ................................................................................................................................... 70

Quantize ......................................................................................................................................... 71

Song Clear...................................................................................................................................... 72

Track Clear...................................................................................................................................... 72

Note Edit......................................................................................................................................... 73

Drum Edit........................................................................................................................................ 74

Copy and paste the recorded data ................................................................................................. 75

Changing the note position etc. of the recorded data..................................................................... 78

Part IV Composer...................................................................................................................................... 80

Outline of the Composer................................................................................................................. 80

Simple recording method................................................................................................................ 81

Create a completely new rhythm .................................................................................................... 82

Chord Modify Change..................................................................................................................... 84

Part Setting..................................................................................................................................... 84

Playback ......................................................................................................................................... 85

Step Record.................................................................................................................................... 86

Measure Edit................................................................................................................................... 87

Pattern Copy................................................................................................................................... 88

QQTG0701

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Part V Disk Drive ....................................................................................................................................... 90

Outline of the Disk Drive function ................................................................................................... 90

Outline of the procedure................................................................................................................. 92

Loading data................................................................................................................................... 93

Direct Play ...................................................................................................................................... 95

Song Medley................................................................................................................................... 96

Saving data..................................................................................................................................... 97

Disk management........................................................................................................................... 99

Set the automatic display when a disk is inserted ........................................................................ 100

Part VI Sound........................................................................................................................................... 101

Outline of the Sound..................................................................................................................... 101

Part Setting................................................................................................................................... 102

Mixer............................................................................................................................................. 104

Master Tuning ............................................................................................................................... 106

Key Scaling................................................................................................................................... 106

Sound Load Option....................................................................................................................... 107

APC Reverb Setting...................................................................................................................... 107

Part VII Reverb & Effect.......................................................................................................................... 108

Outline of the Reverb & Effect ...................................................................................................... 108

Tone Control ................................................................................................................................. 108

Part VIII Sound Edit................................................................................................................................. 109

Outline of the Sound Edit.............................................................................................................. 109

Easy Edit....................................................................................................................................... 110

Tone Edit....................................................................................................................................... 110

Pitch Edit....................................................................................................................................... 113

Filter Edit....................................................................................................................................... 114

Amplitude Edit............................................................................................................................... 116

LFO Edit........................................................................................................................................ 117

Effect Edit ..................................................................................................................................... 118

Controller Edit............................................................................................................................... 118

Store the new sound..................................................................................................................... 119

Part IX Control......................................................................................................................................... 120

Outline of Control functions .......................................................................................................... 120

Pedal Setting ................................................................................................................................ 120

Part X Customize..................................................................................................................................... 122

Outline of Customize functions..................................................................................................... 122

Display Time Out .......................................................................................................................... 123

Data Protection............................................................................................................................. 124

MIDI Setting Load Option ............................................................................................................. 124

Part XI MIDI .............................................................................................................................................. 125

What is MIDI?............................................................................................................................... 125

Outline of MIDI functions .............................................................................................................. 126

Part Setting................................................................................................................................... 127

Control Messages......................................................................................................................... 128

Realtime Messages...................................................................................................................... 128

Common Setting........................................................................................................................... 129

Mode Setting................................................................................................................................. 130

Input/output Setting....................................................................................................................... 130

MIDI Presets................................................................................................................................. 131

Computer Connection................................................................................................................... 132

Initialize...................................................................................................................................................... 133

Connections .............................................................................................................................................. 134

Assembly ................................................................................................................................................... 135

Symptoms which appear to be signs of trouble .................................................................................... 136

Error messages......................................................................................................................................... 138

Index........................................................................................................................................................... 140

Specifications............................................................................................................................................ 141

Ⅲ Supplied accessories

Please check the supplied accessories.

□ Music stand

□ CD-ROM

□ AC cord

QQTG0701

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Controls and functions

PIANO STYLIST

You can choose to have

all the settings of this

instrument automatically

RHYTHM GROUP

Various rhythm patterns are

available for each rhythm

group.

AUTO PLAY CHORD

Add an automatic

accompaniment to your

selected rhythm.

set. (Refer to page 50.)

(Refer to page 44.)

(Refer to page 41.)

FADE

AUTO PLAY CHORD

APC/SEQUENCER

VOLUME

TEMPO / PROGRAM

RHYTHM GROUP

SPLIT

POINT

ONE TOUCH

PLAY

SOUND

FUNK &

BALLROOM

& SHOW

MAIN

VOLUME

MODE

OFF/ON

OUT ARRANGER

METRONOME POP

ROCK

SOUL

DISCO POP BALLAD BALLAD

MAX

SET

CHORD FINDER

WALTZ

JAZZ & LATIN &

PROGRESSIVE

PIANIST

8 BEAT 16 BEAT

USA

& TRAD SWING WORLD MEMORY

PIANO STYLIST

CONTRAST

OFF

MIN

LOAD

BEAT

TAP TEMPO

MUSIC STYLE ARRANGER

VARIATION

FILL IN

INTRO & ENDING

SYNCHRO & BREAK

START / STOP

TRANSPOSE

HELP OTHER PARTS/TR

DEMO

SEQUENCER COUNT

RESET INTRO

TRANSPOSE

PROGRESSIVE PIANIST

FADE IN/OUT

Raise or lower the key

of the entire keyboard.

(Refer to page 39.)

Your piano offers a fun method

of learning to play piano.

(Refer to page 14.)

Begin your song with a slowly

increasing volume, or end it by

having the sound slowly fade away.

(Refer to page 48.)

Tuning

Unlike an acoustic piano, your PR Series Digital Ensemble never needs tuning.

The pitch of this instrument can be adjusted for when playing along with other instruments.

(Refer to page 106.)

QQTG0701

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

FAVORITES

Fashion a customized display

in which all your favorite

sounds, rhythms and styles etc. are

assembled. (Refer to page 30.)

DISPLAY

Displays performance information,

function settings and other messages.

(Refer to page 27.)

SOUND GROUP

Various sounds are

available for each

sound group.

SEQUENCER

Record and play

back your

performance.

(Refer to page 54.)

Use the CONTRAST buttons to

adjust the display so that it is easy to

read.

(Refer to page 31.)

SEQUENCER

SOUND GROUP

GUITAR &

SAX

ORGAN

SOUND

EASY

PROGRAM

MENUS

DISK

IN USE

STRINGS VOCAL HARPSI BRASS WOODWIND ACCORDION SYNTH EXPLORER

PLAY

REC FAVORITES

DISK

LOAD

CHORD STEP REC

CONDUCTOR

RIGHT 2

MALLET

PIANO

ORCH

DIGITAL

EFFECT

MULTI

BASS ORCH PERC WORLD MIXTURES MIXTURES DRAWBARS DRUM KITS MEMORY

LEFT

RIGHT 1

EFFECT CHORUS REVERB

P.MEM 5-8

DISPLAY HOLD EXIT

GRAND UPRIGHT ELECTRIC MODERN

SIMPLE PIANO

TECHNI-CHORD

BANK

SET

1 / 5

2 / 6

3 / 7

4 / 8

PAGE

PIANO

PANEL MEMORY

CONDUCTOR

EFFECT

PANEL MEMORY

Assign a different sound to

each part, then assign the

desired parts to sections of

the keyboard.

Add various effects

to the sounds.

(Refer to page 37.)

Store the panel settings,

then recall them

instantaneously just by

pressing a button or two.

(Refer to page 52.)

(Refer to page 34.)

TECHNI-CHORD

Block chords are

automatically added to the

melody.

(Refer to page 40.)

QQTG0701

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Getting started

FADE

SEQUENCER

AUTO PLAY CHORD

APC/SEQUENCER

VOLUME

RHYTHM GROUP

TEMPO

PROGRAM

SOUND GROUP

GUITAR

SAX

ORGAN

SOUND

EASY

PROGRAM

MENUS

DISK

SPLIT

POINT

ONE TOUCH

PLAY

SOUND

FUNK

BALLROOM

SHOW

MAIN

MODE OFF/ON

OUT ARRANGER

METRONOME POP

ROCK

SOUL

DISCO POP BALLAD BALLAD

STRINGS VOCAL HARPSI BRASS WOODWIND ACCORDION SYNTH EXPLORER

PLAY

REC FAVORITES

DISK

LOAD

IN USE

VOLUME

MAX

SET

CHORD FINDER

CHORD STEP REC

CONDUCTOR

MALLET

PIANO

ORCH

DIGITAL

EFFECT

MULTI

WALTZ

JAZZ

LATIN

PROGRESSIVE

PIANIST

BASS ORCH PERC WORLD MIXTURES MIXTURES DRAWBARS DRUM KITS MEMORY

LEFT

RIGHT

EFFECT CHORUS REVERB

BEAT 16 BEAT

USA

TRAD SWING WORLD MEMORY

PIANO STYLIST

CONTRAST

OFF

MIN

P.MEM 5-8

LOAD

BEAT

TAP TEMPO

MUSIC STYLE ARRANGER

VARIATION

FILL IN

INTRO

ENDING

SYNCHRO

BREAK

START

STOP

TRANSPOSE

HELP OTHER

PARTS/TR

DISPLAY HOLD EXIT

GRAND UPRIGHT ELECTRIC MODERN

SIMPLE PIANO

TECHNI-CHORD

BANK

SET

DEMO

MUTE

PAGE

SEQUENCER COUNT

RESET INTRO

PIANO

PANEL MEMORY

Plug the power cord into an outlet.

Set the MAIN VOLUME to an

appropriate level with the sliding control.

MAIN

VOLUME

MAX

Press the POWER button to turn it on.

POWER

OFF

MIN

(Right end of the keyboard)

• The power indicator in the left front of the body is

lit.

Touch any note on the keyboard.

• Your piano features Touch Response. You

control the volume by playing the keys harder or

softer.

Keyboard cover

Open and close the cover slowly.

Music Stand

Insert the music stand in the two holes as

shown in the diagram.

QQTG0701

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Playing the piano

Your piano is equipped with various fine functions which make it an extremely versatile instrument. But it

should be remembered that it is first of all a fine piano. Select one of the piano sounds and enjoy its

excellent quality.

When you activate the SIMPLE PIANO feature, the entire keyboard is instantly transformed into a piano,

regardless of the current instrument settings.

FADE

SEQUENCER

AUTO PLAY CHORD

APC/SEQUENCER

VOLUME

RHYTHM GROUP

TEMPO

PROGRAM

SOUND GROUP

GUITAR

SAX

ORGAN

SOUND

EASY

PROGRAM

MENUS

DISK

SPLIT

POINT

ONE TOUCH

PLAY

SOUND

FUNK

BALLROOM

SHOW

MAIN

MODE OFF/ON

OUT ARRANGER

METRONOME POP

ROCK

SOUL

DISCO POP BALLAD BALLAD

STRINGS VOCAL HARPSI BRASS WOODWIND ACCORDION SYNTH EXPLORER

PLAY

REC FAVORITES

DISK

LOAD

IN USE

VOLUME

MAX

SET

CHORD FINDER

CHORD STEP REC

CONDUCTOR

MALLET

PIANO

ORCH

DIGITAL

EFFECT

MULTI

WALTZ

JAZZ

LATIN

PROGRESSIVE

PIANIST

BASS ORCH PERC WORLD MIXTURES MIXTURES DRAWBARS DRUM KITS MEMORY

LEFT

RIGHT

EFFECT CHORUS REVERB

BEAT 16 BEAT

USA

TRAD SWING WORLD MEMORY

PIANO STYLIST

CONTRAST

OFF

MIN

P.MEM 5-8

LOAD

BEAT

TAP TEMPO

MUSIC STYLE ARRANGER

VARIATION

FILL IN

INTRO

ENDING

SYNCHRO

BREAK

START

STOP

TRANSPOSE

HELP OTHER

PARTS/TR

DISPLAY HOLD EXIT

GRAND UPRIGHT ELECTRIC MODERN

SIMPLE PIANO

TECHNI-CHORD

BANK

SET

DEMO

MUTE

PAGE

SEQUENCER COUNT

RESET INTRO

PIANO

PANEL MEMORY

Press the SIMPLE PIANO button to turn

it on.

SIMPLE PIANO

• The indicator lights.

• The display changes to the SIMPLE PIANO

display.

Select the desired type of piano sound.

• The sounds and effects are automatically set.

• “COMPLETED!” is shown on the display, and

then the normal display reappears.

Play anywhere on the keyboard.

• This procedure will cancel the current settings for sounds

and effects, etc. Therefore, if you wish to later recall the

current settings, be sure to store them in the PANEL

MEMORY (page 52) or save them to a disk (page 97)

before beginning this procedure.

QQTG0701

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Progressive Pianist

Your piano offers a fun method of learning to play piano. Start one of the 100 etudes incorporated in this

piano, read the music in the display, listen to the gentle accompaniment for your own and, have a good

practice!

FADE

SEQUENCER

AUTO PLAY CHORD

APC/SEQUENCER

VOLUME

RHYTHM GROUP

TEMPO

PROGRAM

SOUND GROUP

GUITAR

SAX

ORGAN

SOUND

EASY

PROGRAM

MENUS

DISK

IN USE

SPLIT

POINT

ONE TOUCH

PLAY

SOUND

FUNK

BALLROOM

SHOW

MAIN

MODE OFF/ON

OUT ARRANGER

METRONOME POP

ROCK

SOUL

DISCO POP BALLAD BALLAD

STRINGS VOCAL HARPSI BRASS WOODWIND ACCORDION SYNTH EXPLORER

PLAY

REC FAVORITES

DISK

VOLUME

MAX

SET

CHORD FINDER

LOAD

CHORD STEP REC

CONDUCTOR

MALLET

PIANO

ORCH

DIGITAL

EFFECT

MULTI

WALTZ

JAZZ

LATIN

PROGRESSIVE

PIANIST

BASS ORCH PERC WORLD MIXTURES MIXTURES DRAWBARS DRUM KITS MEMORY

LEFT

RIGHT

EFFECT CHORUS REVERB

BEAT 16 BEAT

USA

TRAD SWING WORLD MEMORY

PIANO STYLIST

CONTRAST

OFF

MIN

P.MEM 5-8

LOAD

BEAT

TAP TEMPO

MUSIC STYLE ARRANGER

VARIATION

FILL IN

INTRO

ENDING

SYNCHRO

BREAK

START

STOP

TRANSPOSE

HELP OTHER

PARTS/TR

DISPLAY HOLD EXIT

GRAND UPRIGHT ELECTRIC MODERN

SIMPLE PIANO

TECHNI-CHORD

BANK

SET

DEMO

MUTE

PAGE

SEQUENCER COUNT

RESET INTRO

PIANO

PANEL MEMORY

1 9

2-8

Press the PROGRESSIVE PIANIST

button.

When you have finished listening, press

the appropriate button to access the next

step.

• In the Practice Makes Perfect/Musical Discovery

mode, press the PLAY (STEP2) button, and for

the Grand Performer/Pianist Mode Session

mode, follow the step number to continue your

practice.

PROGRESSIVE

PIANIST

Select the goal of the practice.

Press the RESET button.

• The MEASURE returns to the beginning of the

song.

Press the START/STOP button to start

the exercise. Play the keyboard and

follow the music exactly.

• To redo your exercise from the beginning, press

the START/STOP button to stop the music and

press the SEQUENCER RESET (FILL IN 1)

button. You can also use the MEAS button to

start from a desired position.

• If the tempo of the accompaniment is too fast,

press the SLOW 1 button in the ONE TOUCH

TEMPO section. If it is still too fast, press the

SLOW 2 button. (You can also use the

Use the SONG ∧ and ∨ buttons to select

a preferred song.

TEMPO/PROGRAM dial to adjust the tempo.)

• The music pages shown on the display turn

automatically. If you wish to turn them manually,

set TURN PAGE to MANUAL and you can press

the PAGE button to change the display (upper;

previous page, lower; next page). In this case,

you can also turn the page by depressing the left

pedal.

• To play a different song while the performance is

stopped, press the EXIT button, and then repeat

the above procedure from step 2.

Press the LISTEN button.

To exit this feature, press the

PROGRESSIVE PIANIST button again.

Press the START/STOP button on the

control panel and listen to the model

interpretation while watching the music

on the display.

• Press the START/STOP button to stop the

model performance. Press it again to continue

the interpretation from the point at which it was

interrupted.

QQTG0701

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

See and listen to the

demonstration

FADE

SEQUENCER

AUTO PLAY CHORD

APC/SEQUENCER

VOLUME

RHYTHM GROUP

TEMPO

PROGRAM

SOUND GROUP

GUITAR

SAX

ORGAN

SOUND

EASY

PROGRAM

MENUS

DISK

SPLIT

POINT

ONE TOUCH

PLAY

SOUND

FUNK

BALLROOM

SHOW

MAIN

MODE OFF/ON

OUT ARRANGER

METRONOME POP

ROCK

SOUL

DISCO POP BALLAD BALLAD

STRINGS VOCAL HARPSI BRASS WOODWIND ACCORDION SYNTH EXPLORER

PLAY

REC FAVORITES

DISK

LOAD

IN USE

VOLUME

MAX

SET

CHORD FINDER

CHORD STEP REC

CONDUCTOR

MALLET

PIANO

ORCH

DIGITAL

EFFECT

MULTI

WALTZ

JAZZ

LATIN

PROGRESSIVE

PIANIST

BASS ORCH PERC WORLD MIXTURES MIXTURES DRAWBARS DRUM KITS MEMORY

LEFT

RIGHT

EFFECT CHORUS REVERB

BEAT 16 BEAT

USA

TRAD SWING WORLD MEMORY

PIANO STYLIST

CONTRAST

OFF

MIN

P.MEM 5-8

LOAD

BEAT

TAP TEMPO

MUSIC STYLE ARRANGER

VARIATION

FILL IN

INTRO

ENDING

SYNCHRO

BREAK

START

STOP

TRANSPOSE

HELP OTHER

PARTS/TR

DISPLAY HOLD EXIT

GRAND UPRIGHT ELECTRIC MODERN

SIMPLE PIANO

TECHNI-CHORD

BANK

SET

DEMO

MUTE

PAGE

SEQUENCER COUNT

RESET INTRO

PIANO

PANEL MEMORY

1 3

Press the DEMO button.

DEMO

Use the buttons to the left and right the

display to select the demonstration tune

you wish to see and listen to.

• The demonstration performance and display

corresponding to your selection will begin.

• To end the demonstration before it has finished,

press the START/STOP button.

When you are finished listening to the

demonstration tunes, press the DEMO

button again.

• If you press and hold the DEMO button for a few seconds,

or if you press first the DEMO button and then the

START/STOP button, all the internal demo tunes are

demonstrated in order in a medley performance. The

medley performance continues until the START/STOP

button or the DEMO button is pressed again.

• Some of the buttons do not function during the DEMO

mode.

QQTG0701

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Select a sound

FADE

SEQUENCER

AUTO PLAY CHORD

APC/SEQUENCER

VOLUME

RHYTHM GROUP

TEMPO

PROGRAM

SOUND GROUP

GUITAR

SAX

ORGAN

SOUND

EASY

PROGRAM

MENUS

DISK

SPLIT

POINT

ONE TOUCH

PLAY

SOUND

FUNK

BALLROOM

SHOW

MAIN

MODE OFF/ON

OUT ARRANGER

METRONOME POP

ROCK

SOUL

DISCO POP BALLAD BALLAD

STRINGS VOCAL HARPSI BRASS WOODWIND ACCORDION SYNTH EXPLORER

PLAY

REC FAVORITES

DISK

LOAD

IN USE

VOLUME

MAX

SET

CHORD FINDER

CHORD STEP REC

CONDUCTOR

MALLET

PIANO

ORCH

DIGITAL

EFFECT

MULTI

WALTZ

JAZZ

LATIN

PROGRESSIVE

PIANIST

BASS ORCH PERC WORLD MIXTURES MIXTURES DRAWBARS DRUM KITS MEMORY

LEFT

RIGHT

EFFECT CHORUS REVERB

BEAT 16 BEAT

USA

TRAD SWING WORLD MEMORY

PIANO STYLIST

CONTRAST

OFF

MIN

P.MEM 5-8

LOAD

BEAT

TAP TEMPO

MUSIC STYLE ARRANGER

VARIATION

FILL IN

INTRO

ENDING

SYNCHRO

BREAK

START

STOP

TRANSPOSE

HELP OTHER

PARTS/TR

DISPLAY HOLD EXIT

GRAND UPRIGHT ELECTRIC MODERN

SIMPLE PIANO

TECHNI-CHORD

BANK

SET

DEMO

MUTE

PAGE

SEQUENCER COUNT

RESET INTRO

PIANO

PANEL MEMORY

2 1 A

In the CONDUCTOR section on the

panel, press the RIGHT 1 button to turn

it on.

Add reverberation.

Press the REVERB button to turn it on.

CONDUCTOR

RIGHT 2

LEFT

RIGHT 1

REVERB

In the SOUND GROUP or PIANO

section, press one of the sound buttons.

SOUND GROUP

GUITAR &

SAX &

ORGAN &

SOUND

STRINGS VOCAL HARPSI BRASS WOODWIND ACCORDION SYNTH EXPLORER

MALLET &

PIANO

ORCH

DIGITAL

BASS ORCH PERC WORLD MIXTURES MIXTURES DRAWBARS DRUM KITS MEMORY

GRAND UPRIGHT ELECTRIC MODERN

PIANO

Select a sound from the list of sounds

shown on the display.

• For most of the buttons, the list of sounds is

contained on two or more screen “pages.” To

see a different part of the list, press either PAGE

button.

Play the keyboard.

QQTG0701

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Select the registration for a

music style ^{(PIANO STYLIST)}

FADE

SEQUENCER

AUTO PLAY CHORD

APC/SEQUENCER

VOLUME

RHYTHM GROUP

TEMPO

PROGRAM

SOUND GROUP

GUITAR

SAX

ORGAN

SOUND

EASY

PROGRAM

MENUS

DISK

SPLIT

POINT

ONE TOUCH

PLAY

SOUND

FUNK

BALLROOM

SHOW

MAIN

MODE OFF/ON

OUT ARRANGER

METRONOME POP

ROCK

SOUL

DISCO POP BALLAD BALLAD

STRINGS VOCAL HARPSI BRASS WOODWIND ACCORDION SYNTH EXPLORER

PLAY

REC FAVORITES

DISK

LOAD

IN USE

VOLUME

MAX

SET

CHORD FINDER

CHORD STEP REC

CONDUCTOR

MALLET

PIANO

ORCH

DIGITAL

EFFECT

MULTI

WALTZ

JAZZ

LATIN

PROGRESSIVE

PIANIST

BASS ORCH PERC WORLD MIXTURES MIXTURES DRAWBARS DRUM KITS MEMORY

LEFT

RIGHT

EFFECT CHORUS REVERB

BEAT 16 BEAT

USA

TRAD SWING WORLD MEMORY

PIANO STYLIST

CONTRAST

OFF

MIN

P.MEM 5-8

LOAD

BEAT

TAP TEMPO

MUSIC STYLE ARRANGER

VARIATION

FILL IN

INTRO

ENDING

SYNCHRO

BREAK

START

STOP

TRANSPOSE

HELP OTHER

PARTS/TR

DISPLAY HOLD EXIT

GRAND UPRIGHT ELECTRIC MODERN

SIMPLE PIANO

TECHNI-CHORD

BANK

SET

DEMO

MUTE

PAGE

SEQUENCER COUNT

RESET INTRO

PIANO

PANEL MEMORY

1 7

2-6

Press the PIANO STYLIST button to

turn it on.

Use the GENRE/ERA/ALPHABET

button to select a group. Use the STYLE

button to select a style.

• In the above example, GENRE was selected.

• If the list covers more than one screen “page,”

the MORE button is shown on the display. Use

the MORE button to switch between screen

pages.

• The AUTO PLAY CHORD and SYNCHRO &

BREAK turn on, and the sounds, effects,

rhythm, tempo, volume balance, etc. which are

best suited for the selected music style are

automatically selected.

PIANO STYLIST

Press the PIANO STYLES button.

Play the keyboard.

• When you specify a chord on the left area of the

keyboard, the automatic accompaniment

immediately begins to play.

• You can use the TEMPO/PROGRAM dial to

adjust the tempo.

When you are finished selecting the

style, turn the PIANO STYLIST button

off.

Use the ARRANGE MODE button to

select the desired type of arrangement.

• Select the type you wish to play (PIANO

SOLO/PIANO & COMBO/PIANO &

ENSEMBLE).

Use the SELECT MODE button to

specify how you wish to select a style.

GENRE: Select a style by musical genre.

ERA: Select a style by era.

ALPHABET: Select a style from an alphabetical

list.

QQTG0701

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Automatic panel settings

(ONE TOUCH PLAY)

FADE

SEQUENCER

AUTO PLAY CHORD

APC/SEQUENCER

VOLUME

RHYTHM GROUP

TEMPO

PROGRAM

SOUND GROUP

GUITAR

SAX

ORGAN

SOUND

EASY

PROGRAM

MENUS

DISK

SPLIT

POINT

ONE TOUCH

PLAY

SOUND

FUNK

BALLROOM

SHOW

MAIN

MODE OFF/ON

OUT ARRANGER

METRONOME POP

ROCK

SOUL

DISCO POP BALLAD BALLAD

STRINGS VOCAL HARPSI BRASS WOODWIND ACCORDION SYNTH EXPLORER

PLAY

REC FAVORITES

DISK

LOAD

IN USE

VOLUME

MAX

SET

CHORD FINDER

CHORD STEP REC

CONDUCTOR

MALLET

PIANO

ORCH

DIGITAL

EFFECT

MULTI

WALTZ

JAZZ

LATIN

PROGRESSIVE

PIANIST

BASS ORCH PERC WORLD MIXTURES MIXTURES DRAWBARS DRUM KITS MEMORY

LEFT

RIGHT

EFFECT CHORUS REVERB

BEAT 16 BEAT

USA

TRAD SWING WORLD MEMORY

PIANO STYLIST

CONTRAST

OFF

MIN

P.MEM 5-8

LOAD

BEAT

TAP TEMPO

MUSIC STYLE ARRANGER

VARIATION

FILL IN

INTRO

ENDING

SYNCHRO

BREAK

START

STOP

TRANSPOSE

HELP OTHER

PARTS/TR

DISPLAY HOLD EXIT

GRAND UPRIGHT ELECTRIC MODERN

SIMPLE PIANO

TECHNI-CHORD

BANK

SET

DEMO

MUTE

PAGE

SEQUENCER COUNT

RESET INTRO

PIANO

PANEL MEMORY

3 5 1

In the RHYTHM GROUP section, press

the button for a desired rhythm.

RHYTHM GROUP

Use your left hand to play the chords

and your right hand to play the melody.

• Pressing a key on the left area of the keyboard

will cause the automatic rhythm pattern to start

playing (synchro start).

FUNK &

BALLROOM

METRONOME POP

ROCK

SOUL

DISCO POP BALLAD BALLAD & SHOW

At the end of your performance, press

the INTRO & ENDING 1 or 2 button.

WALTZ

JAZZ & LATIN &

8 BEAT 16 BEAT

USA

& TRAD SWING WORLD MEMORY

LOAD

INTRO & ENDING

• Do not select the METRONOME or the

MEMORY button.

Select a rhythm from the list of rhythms

on the display.

• An ending pattern is played, after which the

automatic accompaniment stops.

• If the START/STOP button is pressed, the

accompaniment stops immediately.

Press and hold the ONE TOUCH PLAY

button for a few seconds.

ONE TOUCH

PLAY

• The sound, effects and tempo suitable for the

selected rhythm are automatically selected.

The tempo can be adjusted with the

TEMPO/PROGRAM dial.

QQTG0701

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

• In this example you played chords by pressing the keys for

the “root notes” (ONE FINGER chords). But you can also

specify the chord by playing all the notes in the chord.

(Refer to page 45.)

• You can insert a fill-in pattern while the preset rhythm

pattern is playing by pressing either the FILL IN 1 or FILL

IN 2 button.

QQTG0701

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Record your performance

(SEQUENCER)

FADE

SEQUENCER

AUTO PLAY CHORD

APC/SEQUENCER

VOLUME

RHYTHM GROUP

TEMPO

PROGRAM

SOUND GROUP

GUITAR

SAX

ORGAN

SOUND

EASY

PROGRAM

MENUS

DISK

SPLIT

POINT

ONE TOUCH

PLAY

SOUND

FUNK

BALLROOM

SHOW

MAIN

MODE OFF/ON

OUT ARRANGER

METRONOME POP

ROCK

SOUL

DISCO POP BALLAD BALLAD

STRINGS VOCAL HARPSI BRASS WOODWIND ACCORDION SYNTH EXPLORER

PLAY

REC FAVORITES

DISK

LOAD

IN USE

VOLUME

MAX

SET

CHORD FINDER

CHORD STEP REC

CONDUCTOR

MALLET

PIANO

ORCH

DIGITAL

EFFECT

MULTI

WALTZ

JAZZ

LATIN

PROGRESSIVE

PIANIST

BASS ORCH PERC WORLD MIXTURES MIXTURES DRAWBARS DRUM KITS MEMORY

LEFT

RIGHT

EFFECT CHORUS REVERB

BEAT 16 BEAT

USA

TRAD SWING WORLD MEMORY

PIANO STYLIST

CONTRAST

OFF

MIN

P.MEM 5-8

LOAD

BEAT

TAP TEMPO

MUSIC STYLE ARRANGER

VARIATION

FILL IN

INTRO

ENDING

SYNCHRO

BREAK

START

STOP

TRANSPOSE

HELP OTHER

PARTS/TR

DISPLAY HOLD EXIT

GRAND UPRIGHT ELECTRIC MODERN

SIMPLE PIANO

TECHNI-CHORD

BANK

SET

DEMO

MUTE

PAGE

SEQUENCER COUNT

RESET INTRO

PIANO

PANEL MEMORY

Sonatina

Right hand

Left hand

In the SEQUENCER section, press the

EASY REC button to turn it on.

Press the OK button.

SEQUENCER

EASY

REC

PLAY

• The display changes to the REALTIME

RECORD display.

QQTG0701

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

FADE

SEQUENCER

AUTO PLAY CHORD

APC/SEQUENCER

VOLUME

RHYTHM GROUP

TEMPO

PROGRAM

SOUND GROUP

GUITAR

SAX

ORGAN

SOUND

EASY

PROGRAM

MENUS

DISK

SPLIT

POINT

ONE TOUCH

PLAY

SOUND

FUNK

BALLROOM

SHOW

MAIN

MODE OFF/ON

OUT ARRANGER

METRONOME POP

ROCK

SOUL

DISCO POP BALLAD BALLAD

STRINGS VOCAL HARPSI BRASS WOODWIND ACCORDION SYNTH EXPLORER

PLAY

REC FAVORITES

DISK

LOAD

IN USE

VOLUME

MAX

SET

CHORD FINDER

CHORD STEP REC

CONDUCTOR

MALLET

PIANO

ORCH

DIGITAL

EFFECT

MULTI

WALTZ

JAZZ

LATIN

PROGRESSIVE

PIANIST

BASS ORCH PERC WORLD MIXTURES MIXTURES DRAWBARS DRUM KITS MEMORY

LEFT

RIGHT

EFFECT CHORUS REVERB

BEAT 16 BEAT

USA

TRAD SWING WORLD MEMORY

PIANO STYLIST

CONTRAST

OFF

MIN

P.MEM 5-8

LOAD

BEAT

TAP TEMPO

MUSIC STYLE ARRANGER

VARIATION

FILL IN

INTRO

ENDING

SYNCHRO

BREAK

START

STOP

TRANSPOSE

HELP OTHER

PARTS/TR

DISPLAY HOLD EXIT

GRAND UPRIGHT ELECTRIC MODERN

SIMPLE PIANO

TECHNI-CHORD

BANK

SET

DEMO

MUTE

PAGE

SEQUENCER COUNT

RESET INTRO

PIANO

PANEL MEMORY

A B

Playing back your recorded

performance

Play the song on the keyboard.

Press the SEQUENCER RESET (FILL

IN 1) button.

When you have finished playing, press

the EASY REC button again to turn it off.

FILL IN

SEQUENCER

EASY

REC

PLAY

SEQUENCER COUNT

RESET INTRO

Press the START/STOP button.

• The PLAY button in the SEQUENCER section

turns on.

BEAT

START / STOP

• Your performance is played back just as you

recorded it.

• When you are finished playing back your

performance, press the PLAY button in the

SEQUENCER section to turn it off.

QQTG0701

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Store your panel settings

(PANEL MEMORY)

FADE

SEQUENCER

AUTO PLAY CHORD

APC/SEQUENCER

VOLUME

RHYTHM GROUP

TEMPO

PROGRAM

SOUND GROUP

GUITAR

SAX

ORGAN

SOUND

EASY

PROGRAM

MENUS

DISK

SPLIT

POINT

ONE TOUCH

PLAY

SOUND

FUNK

BALLROOM

SHOW

MAIN

MODE OFF/ON

OUT ARRANGER

METRONOME POP

ROCK

SOUL

DISCO POP BALLAD BALLAD

STRINGS VOCAL HARPSI BRASS WOODWIND ACCORDION SYNTH EXPLORER

PLAY

REC FAVORITES

DISK

LOAD

IN USE

VOLUME

MAX

SET

CHORD FINDER

CHORD STEP REC

CONDUCTOR

MALLET

PIANO

ORCH

DIGITAL

EFFECT

MULTI

WALTZ

JAZZ

LATIN

PROGRESSIVE

PIANIST

BASS ORCH PERC WORLD MIXTURES MIXTURES DRAWBARS DRUM KITS MEMORY

LEFT

RIGHT

EFFECT CHORUS REVERB

BEAT 16 BEAT

USA

TRAD SWING WORLD MEMORY

PIANO STYLIST

CONTRAST

OFF

MIN

P.MEM 5-8

LOAD

BEAT

TAP TEMPO

MUSIC STYLE ARRANGER

VARIATION

FILL IN

INTRO

ENDING

SYNCHRO

BREAK

START

STOP

TRANSPOSE

HELP OTHER

PARTS/TR

DISPLAY HOLD EXIT

GRAND UPRIGHT ELECTRIC MODERN

SIMPLE PIANO

TECHNI-CHORD

BANK

SET

DEMO

MUTE

PAGE

SEQUENCER COUNT

RESET INTRO

PIANO

PANEL MEMORY

2 3

Set up the desired panel settings

(sounds, volumes, etc.)

With the SET button held down, press

one of the numbered buttons of the

PANEL MEMORY (1 to 8).

Use the BANK button to select a bank

(A, B, C).

P.MEM 5-8

SET

1 / 5

2 / 6

3 / 7

4 / 8

BANK

PANEL MEMORY

• Turning the P.MEM 5-8 button ON enables the

selection of panel settings for numbers 5 to 8.

• The current panel settings are now stored in the

specified bank and number. When you select

the same bank and number again, the stored

panel settings are recalled.

• Lighting up both the A and B indicators enables

C to be selected.

• The bank names are shown on the display.

BANK

QQTG0701

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Save data on a floppy disk

FADE

SEQUENCER

AUTO PLAY CHORD

APC/SEQUENCER

VOLUME

RHYTHM GROUP

TEMPO

PROGRAM

SOUND GROUP

GUITAR

SAX

ORGAN

SOUND

EASY

PROGRAM

MENUS

DISK

SPLIT

POINT

ONE TOUCH

PLAY

SOUND

FUNK

BALLROOM

SHOW

MAIN

MODE OFF/ON

OUT ARRANGER

METRONOME POP

ROCK

SOUL

DISCO POP BALLAD BALLAD

STRINGS VOCAL HARPSI BRASS WOODWIND ACCORDION SYNTH EXPLORER

PLAY

REC FAVORITES

DISK

LOAD

IN USE

VOLUME

MAX

SET

CHORD FINDER

CHORD STEP REC

CONDUCTOR

MALLET

PIANO

ORCH

DIGITAL

EFFECT

MULTI

WALTZ

JAZZ

LATIN

PROGRESSIVE

PIANIST

BASS ORCH PERC WORLD MIXTURES MIXTURES DRAWBARS DRUM KITS MEMORY

LEFT

RIGHT

EFFECT CHORUS REVERB

BEAT 16 BEAT

USA

TRAD SWING WORLD MEMORY

PIANO STYLIST

CONTRAST

OFF

MIN

P.MEM 5-8

LOAD

BEAT

TAP TEMPO

MUSIC STYLE ARRANGER

VARIATION

FILL IN

INTRO

ENDING

SYNCHRO

BREAK

START

STOP

TRANSPOSE

HELP OTHER

PARTS/TR

DISPLAY HOLD EXIT

GRAND UPRIGHT ELECTRIC MODERN

SIMPLE PIANO

TECHNI-CHORD

BANK

SET

DEMO

MUTE

PAGE

SEQUENCER COUNT

RESET INTRO

PIANO

PANEL MEMORY

2-5

Insert a disk you wish to save to into the

Disk Drive slot. Push it all the way in until

you hear a click.

Specify a file number to save to.

MUTE

On the DISK MENU display, select

SAVE.

Press the SAVE button.

• If you attempt to use the SAVE procedure when

an unformatted disk is inserted into the Disk

Drive slot, the FORMAT display appears. Follow

the instructions on the display to format the disk.

(Formatting the disk will clear any data which is

currently stored on the disk.)

• The performance data of the song recorded in

the SEQUENCER is saved on the floppy disk.

Select TECHNICS FORMAT.

QQTG0701

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

FADE

SEQUENCER

AUTO PLAY CHORD

APC/SEQUENCER

VOLUME

RHYTHM GROUP

TEMPO

PROGRAM

SOUND GROUP

GUITAR

SAX

ORGAN

SOUND

EASY

PROGRAM

MENUS

DISK

SPLIT

POINT

ONE TOUCH

PLAY

SOUND

FUNK

BALLROOM

SHOW

MAIN

MODE OFF/ON

OUT ARRANGER

METRONOME POP

ROCK

SOUL

DISCO POP BALLAD BALLAD

STRINGS VOCAL HARPSI BRASS WOODWIND ACCORDION SYNTH EXPLORER

PLAY

REC FAVORITES

DISK

LOAD

IN USE

VOLUME

MAX

SET

CHORD FINDER

CHORD STEP REC

CONDUCTOR

MALLET

PIANO

ORCH

DIGITAL

EFFECT

MULTI

WALTZ

JAZZ

LATIN

PROGRESSIVE

PIANIST

BASS ORCH PERC WORLD MIXTURES MIXTURES DRAWBARS DRUM KITS MEMORY

LEFT

RIGHT

EFFECT CHORUS REVERB

BEAT 16 BEAT

USA

TRAD SWING WORLD MEMORY

PIANO STYLIST

CONTRAST

OFF

MIN

P.MEM 5-8

LOAD

BEAT

TAP TEMPO

MUSIC STYLE ARRANGER

VARIATION

FILL IN

INTRO

ENDING

SYNCHRO

BREAK

START

STOP

TRANSPOSE

HELP OTHER

PARTS/TR

DISPLAY HOLD EXIT

GRAND UPRIGHT ELECTRIC MODERN

SIMPLE PIANO

TECHNI-CHORD

BANK

SET

DEMO

MUTE

PAGE

SEQUENCER COUNT

RESET INTRO

PIANO

PANEL MEMORY

2 3

4 1

Press the LOAD button.

• The data is copied to the internal memory of this

instrument.

Recall data from a floppy disk

Press and hold the DISK button for a few

seconds.

Press the PLAY button in the

SEQUENCER section to turn it on.

DISK

IN USE

DISK

LOAD

SEQUENCER

EASY

REC

PLAY

CHORD STEP REC

Select the file you wish to load.

Press the START/STOP button.

BEAT

START / STOP

MUTE

• The recalled song is played back.

I The following data can be saved/loaded:

CURRENT PANEL (The current panel settings)

PANEL MEMORY

SEQUENCER

PERFORMANCE

COMPOSER (MEMORY contents)

SOUND MEMORY

EFFECT MEMORY

BACKUP

MIDI (USER memory of the MIDI PRESETS) & FAVORITES

• For detailed infomation, refer to page 90.

QQTG0701

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Load rhythm data from a Technics

pattern disk

(COMPOSER LOAD)

FADE

SEQUENCER

AUTO PLAY CHORD

APC/SEQUENCER

VOLUME

RHYTHM GROUP

TEMPO

PROGRAM

SOUND GROUP

GUITAR

SAX

ORGAN

SOUND

EASY

PROGRAM

MENUS

DISK

IN USE

SPLIT

POINT

ONE TOUCH

PLAY

SOUND

FUNK

BALLROOM

SHOW

MAIN

MODE OFF/ON

OUT ARRANGER

METRONOME POP

ROCK

SOUL

DISCO POP BALLAD BALLAD

STRINGS VOCAL HARPSI BRASS WOODWIND ACCORDION SYNTH EXPLORER

PLAY

REC FAVORITES

DISK

VOLUME

MAX

SET

CHORD FINDER

LOAD

CHORD STEP REC

CONDUCTOR

MALLET

PIANO

ORCH

DIGITAL

EFFECT

MULTI

WALTZ

JAZZ

LATIN

PROGRESSIVE

PIANIST

BASS ORCH PERC WORLD MIXTURES MIXTURES DRAWBARS DRUM KITS MEMORY

LEFT

RIGHT

EFFECT CHORUS REVERB

BEAT 16 BEAT

USA

TRAD SWING WORLD MEMORY

PIANO STYLIST

CONTRAST

OFF

MIN

P.MEM 5-8

LOAD

BEAT

TAP TEMPO

MUSIC STYLE ARRANGER

VARIATION

FILL IN

INTRO

ENDING

SYNCHRO

BREAK

START

STOP

TRANSPOSE

HELP OTHER

PARTS/TR

DISPLAY HOLD EXIT

GRAND UPRIGHT ELECTRIC MODERN

SIMPLE PIANO

TECHNI-CHORD

BANK

SET

DEMO

MUTE

PAGE

SEQUENCER COUNT

RESET INTRO

PIANO

PANEL MEMORY

3 4

Insert a commercially sold Technics

pattern disk into the Disk Drive slot.

Press the LOAD button.

In the RHYTHM GROUP section, press

and hold the LOAD (MEMORY) button

for a few seconds.

RHYTHM GROUP

FUNK &

BALLROOM

METRONOME POP

ROCK

SOUL

DISCO POP BALLAD BALLAD & SHOW

• Rhythm data is loaded to the COMPOSER

memory (MEMORY). You can use the rhythms

during your performance, just like the preset

rhythms.

WALTZ

JAZZ & LATIN &

8 BEAT 16 BEAT

USA

& TRAD SWING WORLD MEMORY

LOAD

Select the name of the pattern to load.

MUTE

QQTG0701

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Play back commercial song disks

(DIRECT PLAY)

FADE

SEQUENCER

AUTO PLAY CHORD

APC/SEQUENCER

VOLUME

RHYTHM GROUP

TEMPO

PROGRAM

SOUND GROUP

GUITAR

SAX

ORGAN

SOUND

EASY

PROGRAM

MENUS

DISK

IN USE

SPLIT

POINT

ONE TOUCH

PLAY

SOUND

FUNK

BALLROOM

SHOW

MAIN

MODE OFF/ON

OUT ARRANGER

METRONOME POP

ROCK

SOUL

DISCO POP BALLAD BALLAD

STRINGS VOCAL HARPSI BRASS WOODWIND ACCORDION SYNTH EXPLORER

PLAY

REC FAVORITES

DISK

VOLUME

MAX

SET

CHORD FINDER

LOAD

CHORD STEP REC

CONDUCTOR

MALLET

PIANO

ORCH

DIGITAL

EFFECT

MULTI

WALTZ

JAZZ

LATIN

PROGRESSIVE

PIANIST

BASS ORCH PERC WORLD MIXTURES MIXTURES DRAWBARS DRUM KITS MEMORY

LEFT

RIGHT

EFFECT CHORUS REVERB

BEAT 16 BEAT

USA

TRAD SWING WORLD MEMORY

PIANO STYLIST

CONTRAST

OFF

MIN

P.MEM 5-8

LOAD

BEAT

TAP TEMPO

MUSIC STYLE ARRANGER

VARIATION

FILL IN

INTRO

ENDING

SYNCHRO

BREAK

START

STOP

TRANSPOSE

HELP OTHER

PARTS/TR

DISPLAY HOLD EXIT

GRAND UPRIGHT ELECTRIC MODERN

SIMPLE PIANO

TECHNI-CHORD

BANK

SET

DEMO

MUTE

PAGE

SEQUENCER COUNT

RESET INTRO

PIANO

PANEL MEMORY

2-4

Insert the song disk into the Disk Drive

slot.

Use a the buttons below the display to

select a song.

MUTE

On the DISK MENU display, select

DIRECT PLAY.

• For SMF songs, use the PLAY AS button to

specify a sound arrangement mode.

Press the START button.

• The selected song is played back.

• DIRECT PLAY is possible from the following

disks:

Standard MIDI File

Standard MIDI File with Lyrics

DISK ORCHESTRA COLLECTION™ (DOC)

PianoDisc™

* All product and company names are trademarks or

registered trademarks of their respective owners.

* DISK ORCHESTRA COLLECTION is a trademark of

the YAMAHA Corporation.

QQTG0701

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

About the display

A large-size display, easy to operate with excellent readability, is used for displaying various information

such as the names of the selected sounds and rhythms etc. and when setting the functions. Let’s take a

look.

• The display illustrations shown in this User’s Manual are examples for the sake of clarification; the actual displays on your instru-

ment may differ from the illustrations.

Normal display (HOME PAGE)

This is the kind of information you see on the dis-

play during a normal performance.

RIGHT 1 part sound

RIGHT 2 part sound

Selected rhythm

Tempo

LEFT part sound

Volume of each part

Volume balance

At the bottom half of the normal display, the vol-

ume balance of each part is represented in a

fader illustration and by a number (0 to 127). You

can use the balance buttons below the display to

adjust the volumes.

OTHER PARTS/TR

MUTE

APC: AUTO PLAY CHORD RT: RIGHT

METR: METRONOME

• Pressing either balance button for a muted part will can-

cel the mute function.

When setting the volume balance, press the

upper button to increase the volume and the

lower button to decrease it.

Ⅲ OTHER PARTS/TR

• Hold a button down to scroll the volume quickly.

By the pressing the OTHER PARTS/TR button,

the screen sequentially switches to the respec-

tive volume balance screens of the play part,

auto accompaniment part, playback part (1 to 8),

and playback part (9 to 16). The playback part

(PT) is used to playback recording and song

data.

Pressing the OTHER PARTS/TR button will dis-

play the auto accompaniment part setting

screen.

• DRM: DRUMS ACP: ACCOMP

Ⅲ MUTE

To mute a part, press both the corresponding

upper and lower buttons at the same time.

• The volume display for a muted part is shown as “MUTE.”

QQTG0701

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

PAGE

Setting display

When there are additional parts to the current

display, a page number indication, for example

PAGE1/2, appears in the upper right corner of

the screen. For example, 1/2 indicates that there

are two pages of the display, and the current

page is page 1. In this case, you can use the

upper and lower PAGE buttons, to the right of

the balance buttons, to view different “pages” of

the display.

When you select an item from the menu display,

the setting display for the item is shown.

The buttons to the right, left and/or directly below

the display are used to select and adjust the set-

tings.

Ⅲ Example of setting display: MASTER

TUNING

PAGE

• Press the upper button to view the next page of the dis-

play, and the lower button to view the previous page of

the display.

MUTE

• On the last page of the display, pressing the upper button

returns to the first page. And conversely, on the first page

of the display, pressing the lower button will skip to the

last page.

Press the button corresponding to the ∧ or ∨ but-

ton on the display to change the value.

• In this manual, this procedure is written as follows: “Use

^the∧ ^and∨ ^{buttons to adjust the pitch.”}

Menu display

The PROGRAM MENUS button controls multiple

functions. Press the button to access its menu

display.

TEMPO/PROGRAM

If the TEMPO/PROGRAM indicator is lit while

you are using the display to adjust the setting, it

indicates that this dial can be used to quickly

change the displayed value or setting.

PROGRAM

MENUS

TEMPO / PROGRAM

Ⅲ Example of menu display: PROGRAM

MENUS

Select a function from the menu display by

pressing the corresponding button to the left or

ᮤ

ᮣ

right of the display indicated by the

arrows.

and

• The setting which can be adjusted is highlighted on the

display.

EXIT

While the setting display is shown, press this but-

ton to go back to the previous display.

DISPLAY HOLD EXIT

• In this manual, the steps describing how to select a func-

tion from a menu display are generally abbreviated as fol-

lows, for example: “On the PROGRAM MENUS display,

select SOUND.”

QQTG0701

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

• The following display appears.

DISPLAY HOLD

Press this button to turn it on when you wish to

maintain the current display. You can keep a dis-

play which is normally automatically canceled,

for example, or even during a performance, you

can monitor information which is not shown on

the normal display.

2.Use the buttons below the display to select a

language.

DISPLAY HOLD EXIT

3.Press the OK button.

4.Press a button on the panel whose explana-

• The indicator for this button may flash if the current dis-

play is one which is normally automatically canceled.

• If the PROGRAM MENUS button, for example, is

pressed, the DISPLAY HOLD mode is canceled.

tion you wish to read.

• An explanation of the button’s function is shown on the

display.

CONTRAST

5.Press the HELP button again to exit the help

mode.

Press the CONTRAST button and adjust the dis-

play's viewability using the ∧ and ∨ buttons on

the screen.

• Attention display messages and error messages are also

shown in the selected language.

• The appearance of the display on your instrument may

be different from the illustrated display in this manual

depending on the region in which your instrument was

purchased and the selected display language.

CONTRAST

• When adjusting the CONTRAST, the set value is shown

shortly on the display.

HELP

You can find an explanation of each button’s

function on the display.

1.Press the HELP button.

HELP OTHER PARTS/TR

QQTG0701

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Favorites

AUTO PLA

CHORD

ONE TOUCH

APC/SEQUENCER

VOLUME

FADE

RHYTHM GROUP

TEMPO

PROGRAM

SOUND GROUP

SEQUENCER

SPLIT

POINT

SOUND

FUNK

BALLROOM

SHOW

GUITAR

SAX

ORGAN

SOUND

EASY

REC

PROGRAM

MENUS

DISK

MAIN

MODE

OFF/ON

PLAY

OUT ARRANGER

ROCK

SOUL

DISCO POP BALLAD BALLAD

STRINGS VOCAL HARPSI BRASS WOODWIND ACCORDION SYNTH EXPLORER

PLAY

FAVORITES

DISK

LOAD

VOLUME

MAX

SET

CHORD FINDER

CHORD STEP REC

PIANO

ORCH

CONDUCTOR

RIGHT

DIGITAL

EFFECT

MULTI

EFFECT CHORUS REVERB

WALTZ

TRAD SWING WORLD MEMORY

JAZZ

LATIN

MALLET

DIGITAL

PROGRESSIVE

PIANIST

BEA

16 BEA

USA

BASS ORCH PERC WORLD MIXTURES MIXTURES DRAWBARS DRUM KITS MEMORY

LEFT

RIGHT

PIANO STYLIST

CONTRAST

OFF

MIN

.MEM 5-8

LOAD

BEA

MUSIC STYLE ARRANGER

VARIATION

FILL IN

INTRO

ENDING

SYNCHRO

BREAK

START

STOP

TAP TEMPO

TRANSPOSE

PARTS/TR

DISPLAY

HOLD EXIT

GRAND UPRIGHT ELECTRIC MODERN

SIMPLE PIANO

TECHNI-CHORD

BANK

SET

DEMO

MUTE

PAGE

SEQUENCER COUNT

RESET INTRO

PIANO

PANEL MEMORY

With up to 9 types of sounds, rhythms, functions, etc., you can arrange them to make up your own unique

screen pattern.

1.Press the FAVORITES button to turn it on.

4.While pressing the SET button, specify where

you wish to paste (put) the item.

• While the SET button is depressed, the display appears

as shown below. Use the buttons to the left and right of

the display to specify where you wish to paste the item.

FAVORITES

• The display looks similar to the following.

5.Repeat steps 3 and 4 to create the display you

want.

• There are nine settable items on the display.

2.Press the FAVORITES SETTING button.

• The display looks similar to the following.

6.On the FAVORITES SETTINGS display,

press the OK button.

• Your customized display is stored.

3.Select the desired item.

^{• Use the CATEGORY}∧ ^and∨ ^{buttons to specify a cate-}

^{gory, and then the ITEM}∧ ^and∨ ^{buttons to select an}

item.

• The MUTE KEYS function silences the sound of the key-

board keys. This is convenient when you wish to pretend

to play the keyboard while playing back a recorded per-

formance.

• The PANIC function interrupts the sound, for example,

when it fails to cease during a MIDI performance.

Ⅲ Recall a FAVORITES display

1.Press the FAVORITES button to turn it on.

2.Use the buttons to the left and right of the dis-

play to specify the ITEM you wish to recall.

• The FAVORITES settings can be saved to a disk.

QQTG0701

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Part I Sounds and effects

Overview of sounds

The following is an overview of the sound parts of this instrument.

NX SOUND

Part

NX SOUND is the Technics original sound gen-

erator format which evokes realtime perform-

ance quality and expressive power, and

dramatically expands the number of sounds

and effects generated. This format includes

GM2 (General MIDI Level 2), and make various

controls possible when data is created and

reproduced by computer.

This instrument is organized into the following

parts.

RIGHT 1, RIGHT 2, LEFT:

These are the parts the performer plays on

the keyboard.

• These are independent from the playback parts. For

example one can to perform on the keyboard while

playing back a song disk with 16-part standard MIDI

files (SMF).

• For information about GM2, refer to page 91.

PART1 to 16:

• Equipment with the logo shown below is compatible

SMF song disk playback parts, or parts for

MIDI receive.

with NX SOUND song data.

ACCOMP1 to 5, BASS, DRUMS 1, 2:

Parts for the automatic accompaniment.

METRONOME:

METRONOME part.

Selecting sounds

AUTO PLA

CHORD

ONE TOUCH

APC/SEQUENCER

VOLUME

FADE

RHYTHM GROUP

TEMPO

PROGRAM

SOUND GROUP

SEQUENCER

SPLIT

POINT

SOUND

FUNK

BALLROOM

SHOW

GUITAR

SAX

ORGAN

SOUND

EASY

REC

PROGRAM

MENUS

DISK

MAIN

MODE

OFF/ON

PLAY

OUT ARRANGER

ROCK

SOUL

DISCO POP BALLAD BALLAD

STRINGS VOCAL HARPSI BRASS WOODWIND ACCORDION SYNTH EXPLORER

PLAY

FAVORITES

DISK

LOAD

VOLUME

MAX

SET

CHORD FINDER

CHORD STEP REC

PIANO

ORCH

CONDUCTOR

RIGHT

DIGITAL

EFFECT

MULTI

EFFECT CHORUS REVERB

WALTZ

TRAD SWING WORLD MEMORY

JAZZ

LATIN

MALLET

DIGITAL

PROGRESSIVE

PIANIST

BEA

16 BEA

USA

BASS ORCH PERC WORLD MIXTURES MIXTURES DRAWBARS DRUM KITS MEMORY

LEFT

RIGHT

PIANO STYLIST

CONTRAST

OFF

MIN

.MEM 5-8

LOAD

BEA

MUSIC STYLE ARRANGER

VARIATION

FILL IN

INTRO

ENDING

SYNCHRO

BREAK

START

STOP

AP TEMPO

TRANSPOSE

PARTS/TR

DISPLAY

HOLD EXIT

GRAND UPRIGHT ELECTRIC MODERN

SIMPLE PIANO

TECHNI-CHORD

BANK

SET

DEMO

MUTE

PAGE

SEQUENCER COUNT

RESET INTRO

PIANO

ANEL MEMORY

Select the sounds for the three parts you can play on the keyboard—RIGHT 1, RIGHT 2 and LEFT. After

first selecting a part and a SOUND GROUP, choose the desired sound from the display.

Select a sound

1.In the CONDUCTOR section, choose RIGHT

2.In the SOUND GROUP section, select a

1, RIGHT 2 or LEFT.

sound group.

SOUND GROUP

CONDUCTOR

RIGHT 2

GUITAR &

SAX &

ORGAN &

SOUND

LEFT

RIGHT 1

STRINGS VOCAL HARPSI BRASS WOODWIND ACCORDION SYNTH EXPLORER

MALLET &

PIANO

ORCH

DIGITAL

• The CONDUCTOR buttons are used to specify which

BASS ORCH PERC WORLD MIXTURES MIXTURES DRAWBARS DRUM KITS MEMORY

part is heard. (Refer to page 34.)

GRAND UPRIGHT ELECTRIC MODERN

PIANO

(Continued on the next page)

QQTG0701

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Part I

Sounds and effects

• The sounds in DRUM KITS are percussion sounds that

you play by striking the keyboard keys.

• MEMORY is reserved for storing sounds you modify.

(Refer to page 119.)

Ⅲ ALPHABET

Press the CTG button to show the sound names

in alphabetical order.

• Press the ALP button to return to the CATEGORY display.

3.Select the desired sound from the list on the

display.

Digital Drawbar

You can play organ sounds while controlling the

drawbars on the display.

1.In the CONDUCTOR section, select a part.

2.Press the DIGITAL DRAWBAR button to turn

it on.

DIGITAL

• When you select a sound, the optimum effects for the

sound are automatically applied.

DRAWBARS

You can also choose to cancel this automatic feature.

(Refer to page 107.)

• If there is more than one page to the display, use the

PAGE buttons to move from one screen page to another.

^{• Use the OCTAVE}∧ ^and∨ ^{buttons to select the octave.}

• To exit the sound select display, press the EXIT button.

• The sound you select is memorized for the part you

selected in step 1.

• The display looks similar to the following.

• The sounds that can be selected for the RIGHT 1, RIGHT

2 and LEFT parts and for PART 1-16 vary.

• The illustrated display shows one example, and the

actual display may be different.

4.Play the keyboard.

3.Use the balance buttons below the display to

adjust the volume of each drawbar.

• The volume of each drawbar is illustrated on the display

and changes when you press the corresponding balance

buttons to adjust the volume.

• The DIGITAL DRAWBAR can not be selected for the

ACCOMP and BASS parts of the COMPOSER or

SOUND ARRANGER.

SOUND EXPLORER

This is a convenient feature for finding the sound

you want from the many available sounds.

1.In the CONDUCTOR section, choose RIGHT

1, RIGHT 2 or LEFT.

2.Press the SOUND EXPLORER button to turn

Press the DRAWBAR SETTING button.

it on..

SOUND

EXPLORER

Ⅲ Change the sound type

Use the <Jazz Drawbars> / <Rock Drawbars>

button to select the type of sound.

Ⅲ PERCUSSIVE TONE

3.Use the GRP ∧ and ∨ buttons to select a

PERCUSSIVE TONE adds a tone with a fast ini-

tial attack to the drawbar sounds. You can select

two pitch levels of attack tones.

GROUP of sound.

4.Use the buttons on both side of the display to

select the sound.

Use the PERCUSSIVE TONE 2 2/3’ and 4’ but-

tons to turn the respective tone on or off.

• The numerical value that is displayed for each sound is

the MIDI [BANK MSB, LSB]-PROGRAM CHANGE num-

ber.

• GM2 sounds are selected on this display.

QQTG0701

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Part I

Sounds and effects

Ⅲ TREMOLO

ATTACK TIME:

Tremolo is a rapid oscillation in volume, like the

effect of a rotating speaker. The tremolo speed

can be changed while you are playing.

Use the ∧ and ∨ buttons to adjust the time it

takes for the drawbar sound to sound after

a key is played.

RELEASE TIME:

Use the TREMOLO button to switch between the

SLOW and FAST rotating speeds.

Use the ∧ and ∨ buttons to adjust the time it

takes for the drawbar sound to die out after

the keys are released.

• The tremolo setting is effective for each part in common.

DECAY:

Use the ∧ and ∨ buttons to adjust the time it

takes for the percussive tone to die out.

LEVEL:

• The TREMOLO is disabled if the MULTI EFFECT button

is turned ON.

Use the ∧ and ∨ buttons to adjust the vol-

ume of the percussive tone.

• The above settings are effective for the RIGHT 1, RIGHT

2 and LEFT parts in common.

Ⅲ Other settings

Use the buttons on either side of the display to

select a setting item, and use one of the ∧ and ∨

buttons, whichever is relevant for the selection,

and set.

About foot marks

The foot indication (for example 8’) refers to the pitch of a rank of pipes in a pipe organ. If 8’ is used as

the standard (the pitch as played on the keyboard), a 16’ rank pitch will be one octave below the 8’ rank

pitch, and a 4’ rank pitch one octave above.

When the C key is pressed, the sounds of the different pitch ranks are as follows.

16'

5 ¹/3 '

2²/3 '

2' 1³/5 ' 1¹/3'

QQTG0701

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Part I

Sounds and effects

Assigning parts to

the keyboard

AUTO PLA

CHORD

ONE TOUCH

APC/SEQUENCER

VOLUME

FADE

RHYTHM GROUP

TEMPO

PROGRAM

SOUND GROUP

SEQUENCER

SPLIT

POINT

SOUND

FUNK

BALLROOM

SHOW

GUITAR

SAX

ORGAN

SOUND

EASY

REC

PROGRAM

MENUS

DISK

MAIN

MODE

OFF/ON

PLAY

OUT ARRANGER

ROCK

SOUL

DISCO POP BALLAD BALLAD

STRINGS VOCAL HARPSI BRASS WOODWIND ACCORDION SYNTH EXPLORER

PLAY

FAVORITES

DISK

VOLUME

MAX

SET

CHORD FINDER

LOAD

CHORD STEP REC

PIANO

ORCH

CONDUCTOR

RIGHT

DIGITAL

EFFECT

MULTI

EFFECT CHORUS REVERB

WALTZ

TRAD SWING WORLD MEMORY

JAZZ

LATIN

MALLET

DIGITAL

PROGRESSIVE

PIANIST

BEA

16 BEA

USA

BASS ORCH PERC WORLD MIXTURES MIXTURES DRAWBARS DRUM KITS MEMORY

LEFT

RIGHT

PIANO STYLIST

CONTRAST

OFF

MIN

.MEM 5-8

LOAD

BEA

MUSIC STYLE ARRANGER

VARIATION

FILL IN

INTRO

ENDING

SYNCHRO

BREAK

START

STOP

AP TEMPO

TRANSPOSE

PARTS/TR

DISPLAY

HOLD EXIT

GRAND UPRIGHT ELECTRIC MODERN

SIMPLE PIANO

TECHNI-CHORD

BANK

SET

DEMO

MUTE

PAGE

SEQUENCER COUNT

RESET INTRO

PIANO

ANEL MEMORY

The CONDUCTOR buttons are used to assign the parts (RIGHT 1, RIGHT 2, LEFT) to the keyboard in

many different ways. For example, you can split the keyboard into right and left sections (SPLIT), and

assign a different sound to each section.

CONDUCTOR

CONDUCTOR settings

How sounds are assigned to the keyboard

All keys produce the RIGHT 1 sound.

CONDUCTOR

RIGHT 2

LEFT

RIGHT 1

All keys produce the RIGHT 2 sound.

CONDUCTOR

RIGHT 2

LEFT

RIGHT 1

RIGHT 2

All keys produce both the RIGHT 1 sound and the RIGHT 2 sound.

CONDUCTOR

RIGHT 2

LEFT

RIGHT 1

RIGHT 1 + RIGHT 2

The left keys produce the LEFT sound and the right keys produce the

RIGHT 1 sound and the RIGHT 2 sound.

CONDUCTOR

RIGHT 2

LEFT

RIGHT 1

LEFT

RIGHT 1 + RIGHT 2

The left keys produce the LEFT sound and the right keys produce the

RIGHT 1 sound.

CONDUCTOR

RIGHT 2

LEFT

RIGHT 1

LEFT

RIGHT 1

The left keys produce the LEFT sound and the right keys produce the

RIGHT 2 sound.

CONDUCTOR

RIGHT 2

LEFT

RIGHT 1

LEFT

RIGHT 2

• The volume for each part can be adjusted independently. (Refer to page 27.)

• The following conditions are in effect when the AUTO PLAY CHORD is used.

—BASIC, ADVANCED mode: You cannot assign sounds to all the keys.

—PIANIST mode: The keyboard cannot be split.

QQTG0701

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Part I

Sounds and effects

SPLIT POINT

You can split the keyboard into right and left sec-

tions (SPLIT), and assign a different sound to

each section.

Ⅲ Customized split point

Use the following procedure if you wish to store a

split point at a location other than G2/C3/C4.

1.Press the LEFT button in the CONDUCTOR

1.Press and hold the SPLIT POINT button for a

to turn it on.

few seconds.

• If the LEFT part does not turn on, then turn off the AUTO

PLAY CHORD, or select any mode except PIANIST.

SPLIT

POINT

2.Use the SPLIT POINT button to define the

point that divides the left and right keyboard

sections.

• The following display appears.

SPLIT

POINT

2.Press a key on the keyboard to specify the

desired split point.

• Each time the SPLIT POINT button is pressed, the indi-

cation moves to the next split point in the following order.

G2 → C3 → C4 → customized split point (all indicators

off) (see below).

• A split point is set at the location of the pressed key, and

is indicated on the keyboard illustration on the display.

• The key at the split point is the lowest note of the right

keyboard section.

• After a few seconds, the display exits the setting mode.

• Whenever the keyboard is split, you can select your cus-

tomized split point by pressing the SPLIT POINT button

until none of the split point indicators is lit. In this case,

the customized split point is indicated on the display.

Pedals

Ⅲ Sustain pedal

When a key is released while this pedal is

depressed, the sound is sustained so that it lin-

gers and slowly fades out.

• This effect does not work for the sounds in the DRUM

KITS group.

Sustain pedal

Soft pedal

• This effect does not work for some sounds.

• The length of the sustain can be set for each part. (Refer

to page 102.)

Ⅲ Soft pedal

When this pedal is depressed, the sound is

softer and the volume is slightly lower.

• You can select a different function to control with this

pedal. (Refer to page 120.)

String resonance

String resonance is the sound heard in an acous-

tic piano when the struck strings produce a sym-

pathetic resonance of the other unstruck strings.

For the GRAND PIANO and UPRIGHT PIANO

sounds, string resonance is produced as long as

the sustain pedal is depressed. The amount of

string resonance can be adjusted.

1.Press and hold the GRAND button for a few

seconds.

GRAND

• STRING RESONANCE DEPTH is shown on the display.

(Continued on the next page)

QQTG0701

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Part I

Sounds and effects

• The higher the number, the greater the amount of reso-

nance.

• When set to 0, there is no string resonance.

2.Use the ∧ and ∨ buttons to adjust the amount

of resonance (0 to 99).

Touch Sensitivity

AUTO PLA

CHORD

ONE TOUCH

APC/SEQUENCER

VOLUME

FADE

RHYTHM GROUP

TEMPO

PROGRAM

SOUND GROUP

SEQUENCER

SPLIT

POINT

SOUND

FUNK

BALLROOM

SHOW

GUITAR

SAX

ORGAN

SOUND

EASY

REC

PROGRAM

MENUS

DISK

MAIN

MODE

OFF/ON

PLAY

OUT ARRANGER

ROCK

SOUL

DISCO POP BALLAD BALLAD

STRINGS VOCAL HARPSI BRASS WOODWIND ACCORDION SYNTH EXPLORER

PLAY

FAVORITES

DISK

LOAD

VOLUME

MAX

SET

CHORD FINDER

CHORD STEP REC

PIANO

ORCH

CONDUCTOR

RIGHT

DIGITAL

EFFECT

MULTI

EFFECT CHORUS REVERB

WALTZ

TRAD SWING WORLD MEMORY

JAZZ

LATIN

MALLET

DIGITAL

PROGRESSIVE

PIANIST

BEA

16 BEA

USA

BASS ORCH PERC WORLD MIXTURES MIXTURES DRAWBARS DRUM KITS MEMORY

LEFT

RIGHT

PIANO STYLIST

CONTRAST

OFF

MIN

.MEM 5-8

LOAD

BEA

MUSIC STYLE ARRANGER

VARIATION

FILL IN

INTRO

ENDING

SYNCHRO

BREAK

START

STOP

AP TEMPO

TRANSPOSE

PARTS/TR

DISPLAY

HOLD EXIT

GRAND UPRIGHT ELECTRIC MODERN

SIMPLE PIANO

TECHNI-CHORD

BANK

SET

DEMO

MUTE

PAGE

SEQUENCER COUNT

RESET INTRO

PIANO

PANEL MEMORY

Adjust keyboard touch response.

MINIMUM RANGE: Specify whether or not the keyboard

keys function when the keys are pressed very softly

(ON/OFF).

• When set to ON, the keys do not function when they are

pressed very softy, as in an acoustic piano. When set to

OFF, the keys function even when they are pressed very

softly.

1.Press the PROGRAM MENUS button to turn it

on.

PROGRAM

MENUS

4.When you have finished adjusting the settings,

• The display looks similar to the following.

press the PROGRAM MENUS button again.

2.Select TOUCH SENSITIVITY.

• The display looks similar to the following.

3.Use the buttons to the left of the display to

select the function you wish to set. Use the L

and M buttons to adjust the setting.

TOUCH SENSITIVITY: This is the keyboard touch response

setting.

• Select from HEAVY 3, HEAVY 2, HEAVY 1, NORMAL

and LIGHT.

QQTG0701

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Part I

Sounds and effects

Effects

AUTO PLA

CHORD

ONE TOUCH

APC/SEQUENCER

VOLUME

FADE

RHYTHM GROUP

TEMPO

PROGRAM

SOUND GROUP

SEQUENCER

SPLIT

POINT

SOUND

FUNK

BALLROOM

SHOW

GUITAR

SAX

ORGAN

SOUND

EASY

REC

PROGRAM

MENUS

DISK

MAIN

MODE

OFF/ON

PLAY

OUT ARRANGER

ROCK

SOUL

DISCO POP BALLAD BALLAD

STRINGS VOCAL HARPSI BRASS WOODWIND ACCORDION SYNTH EXPLORER

PLAY

FAVORITES

DISK

VOLUME

MAX

SET

CHORD FINDER

LOAD

CHORD STEP REC

PIANO

ORCH

CONDUCTOR

RIGHT

DIGITAL

EFFECT

MULTI

EFFECT CHORUS REVERB

WALTZ

TRAD SWING WORLD MEMORY

JAZZ

LATIN

MALLET

DIGITAL

PROGRESSIVE

PIANIST

BEA

16 BEA

USA

BASS ORCH PERC WORLD MIXTURES MIXTURES DRAWBARS DRUM KITS MEMORY

LEFT

RIGHT

PIANO STYLIST

CONTRAST

OFF

MIN

.MEM 5-8

LOAD

BEA

MUSIC STYLE ARRANGER

VARIATION

FILL IN

INTRO

ENDING

SYNCHRO

BREAK

START

STOP

AP TEMPO

TRANSPOSE

PARTS/TR

DISPLAY

HOLD EXIT

GRAND UPRIGHT ELECTRIC MODERN

SIMPLE PIANO

TECHNI-CHORD

BANK

SET

DEMO

MUTE

PAGE

SEQUENCER COUNT

RESET INTRO

PIANO

ANEL MEMORY

3.Use the buttons to the right of the display to

DIGITAL EFFECT

select the type.

DIGITAL EFFECT gives the sound richness and

• If the types comprise more than one display “page,” use

the PAGE buttons to switch pages.

enhances your performance.

• Press the VARI button to enable the variation effect.

1.In the CONDUCTOR or PART SELECT sec-

tion, turn on the part to which this effect will be

applied.

• This display can also be accessed from the REVERB &

EFFECT MENU display. (Refer to page 108.)

2.Press the DIGITAL EFFECT button to turn it

Ⅲ EFFECT EDIT

The effects can be edited and then stored in a

memory.

on.

DIGITAL

EFFECT

1.Select an effect type to use as a base.

2.Press the EFFECT EDIT button.

• The on or off status of the DIGITAL EFFECT is preset for

each sound.

• The display changes to the following.

• This effect does not work for the sounds in the DRUM

KITS sound groups.

• This effect may not work for some sounds.

MULTI EFFECT

The MULTI EFFECT works like a studio effects

processor, providing effects such as CHORUS,

PHASER, DELAY and DISTORTION.

3.Use the PARAMETER L and M buttons to

select the parameter.

1.In the CONDUCTOR or PART SELECT sec-

tion, turn on the part to which this effect will be

applied.

4.Use the VALUE ∧ and ∨ buttons to adjust the

setting.

• The parameters vary depending on the effect type

selected as the base.

• (V) is the abbreviation of VARIATION.

2.Press the MULTI EFFECT button to turn it on.

MULTI

EFFECT

5.Press the WRITE button.

Ⅲ Type and parameter settings

1.Press and hold the MULTI EFFECT button for

a few seconds.

• The display changes to the following.

6.Press the EFFECT NAMING button and

assign a name to the effect, if necessary.

• Refer to page 52 for details about the NAMING proce-

dure.

7.Use the EFFECT MEMORY L and M buttons

to specify the location in which to store the

edited effect.

2.Use the L and M buttons to select an effect

group.

• The EFFECT MEMORY is for edited effects (see below).

8.Press the OK button.

QQTG0701

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Part I

Sounds and effects

• The display looks similar to the following.

REVERB

REVERB applies a reverberation effect to the

sound.

Press the REVERB button to turn it on.

REVERB

2.Use the L and M buttons to select the name

of the effect group.

• EFFECT MEMORY is an edited effect group.

Ⅲ Type and parameter settings

1.Press and hold the REVERB button for a few

seconds.

3.Use the buttons to the right of the display to

select a type.

• The display changes to the following.

Ⅲ EFFECT EDIT

Your edited effect can be stored in a memory for

later recall.

• The procedure is the same as for MULTI EFFECT. (Refer

to page 37.)

BRILLIANCE

2.Use the L and M buttons to select an effect

group.

• The EFFECT MEMORY is an edited effect group.

The brightness of the sound can be set for each

performance part.

1.Press the PROGRAM MENUS button to turn it

3.Use the buttons to the right of the display to

on.

select a type.

• If the types comprise more than one display “page,” use

the PAGE buttons to switch pages.

PROGRAM

MENUS

4.Use the TOTAL DEPTH ∧ and ∨ buttons to

set the depth of the effect.

• This display can also be accessed from the REVERB &

EFFECT MENU display. (Refer to page 108.)

• The display will appear as follows:

Ⅲ EFFECT EDIT

Your edited effect can be stored in a memory for

later recall.

• The procedure is the same as for MULTI EFFECT. (Refer

to page 37.)

2.Select BRILLIANCE.

CHORUS

Add breadth to the sound.

Press the CHORUS button to turn it on.

CHORUS

3.Use the PART ∧ and ∨ buttons to select a

part.

Ⅲ Type and parameter settings

1.Press and hold the CHORUS button for a few

seconds.

4.Use the buttons to the left of the display to

select the level of brightness.

• For some sounds, the brightness does not change.

QQTG0701

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Part I

Sounds and effects

3.Select MIC REVERB & EFFECT.

MIC REVERB & EFFECT

• The display looks similar to the following.

You can add reverb and other effects to sound

from a connected microphone.

• Connect a microphone to this instrument. (Refer to page

134.)

1.Press the PROGRAM MENUS button to turn it

on.

4.Set using the button on the left of the display.

Select the effect name (MIC REVERB/MIC

EFFECT).

PROGRAM

MENUS

5.Set the MIC REVERB.

• Use the PARAMETER L and M buttons to select an

^{attribute, and use the VALUE}∧ ^and∨ ^{buttons to adjust}

the corresponding setting.

• The display will appear as follows:

• You can specify whether or not to apply the reverb with

the MIC REV ON/OFF button.

6.Set the MIC EFFECT.

• Use the PARAMETER L and M buttons to select an

^{attribute, and use the VALUE}∧ ^and∨ ^{buttons to adjust}

the corresponding setting.

• You can specify whether or not to apply the effect with

the MIC EFF ON/OFF button.

2.Select REVERB & EFFECT.

Transpose

AUTO PLA

CHORD

ONE TOUCH

APC/SEQUENCER

VOLUME

FADE

RHYTHM GROUP

TEMPO

PROGRAM

SOUND GROUP

SEQUENCER

SPLIT

POINT

SOUND

FUNK

BALLROOM

SHOW

GUITAR

SAX

ORGAN

SOUND

EASY

REC

PROGRAM

MENUS

DISK

MAIN

MODE

OFF/ON

PLAY

OUT ARRANGER

ROCK

SOUL

DISCO POP BALLAD BALLAD

STRINGS VOCAL HARPSI BRASS WOODWIND ACCORDION SYNTH EXPLORER

PLAY

FAVORITES

DISK

LOAD

VOLUME

MAX

SET

CHORD FINDER

CHORD STEP REC

PIANO

ORCH

CONDUCTOR

RIGHT

DIGITAL

EFFECT

MULTI

EFFECT CHORUS REVERB

WALTZ

TRAD SWING WORLD MEMORY

JAZZ

LATIN

MALLET

DIGITAL

PROGRESSIVE

PIANIST

BEA

16 BEA

USA

BASS ORCH PERC WORLD MIXTURES MIXTURES DRAWBARS DRUM KITS MEMORY

LEFT

RIGHT

PIANO STYLIST

CONTRAST

OFF

MIN

.MEM 5-8

LOAD

BEA

MUSIC STYLE ARRANGER

VARIATION

FILL IN

INTRO

ENDING

SYNCHRO

BREAK

START

STOP

AP TEMPO

TRANSPOSE

PARTS/TR

DISPLAY

HOLD EXIT

GRAND UPRIGHT ELECTRIC MODERN

SIMPLE PIANO

TECHNI-CHORD

BANK

SET

DEMO

MUTE

PAGE

SEQUENCER COUNT

RESET INTRO

PIANO

ANEL MEMORY

The TRANSPOSE buttons are used to change the key of the entire instrument in semi-tone steps across

an entire octave.

Suppose you learn to play a song—in the key of C, for example—and decide you want to sing it, only to

find that it’s either too high or too low for your voice. Your choice is to either learn the song all over again

in a different key, or to use the TRANSPOSE feature.

<Example: transposed to D>

TRANSPOSE

Played keys

Adjust the key with the + and – buttons.

C major

• The key is changed in half-tone increments up to plus or

minus one octave.

Notes that sound

• If the two buttons are pressed at the same time, the key

returns to C.

• When the TRANSPOSE function is active, the trans-

posed key is shown on the HOME PAGE display.

D major

QQTG0701

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Part I

Sounds and effects

Techni-chord

AUTO PLA

CHORD

ONE TOUCH

APC/SEQUENCER

VOLUME

FADE

RHYTHM GROUP

TEMPO

PROGRAM

SOUND GROUP

SEQUENCER

SPLIT

POINT

SOUND

FUNK

BALLROOM

SHOW

GUITAR

SAX

ORGAN

SOUND

EASY

REC

PROGRAM

MENUS

DISK

MAIN

MODE

OFF/ON

PLAY

OUT ARRANGER

ROCK

SOUL

DISCO POP BALLAD BALLAD

STRINGS VOCAL HARPSI BRASS WOODWIND ACCORDION SYNTH EXPLORER

PLAY

FAVORITES

DISK

VOLUME

MAX

SET

CHORD FINDER

LOAD

CHORD STEP REC

PIANO

ORCH

CONDUCTOR

RIGHT

DIGITAL

EFFECT

MULTI

EFFECT CHORUS REVERB

WALTZ

TRAD SWING WORLD MEMORY

JAZZ

LATIN

MALLET

DIGITAL

PROGRESSIVE

PIANIST

BEA

16 BEA

USA

BASS ORCH PERC WORLD MIXTURES MIXTURES DRAWBARS DRUM KITS MEMORY

LEFT

RIGHT

PIANO STYLIST

CONTRAST

OFF

MIN

.MEM 5-8

LOAD

BEA

MUSIC STYLE ARRANGER

VARIATION

FILL IN

INTRO

ENDING

SYNCHRO

BREAK

START

STOP

AP TEMPO

TRANSPOSE

PARTS/TR

DISPLAY

HOLD EXIT

GRAND UPRIGHT ELECTRIC MODERN

SIMPLE PIANO

TECHNI-CHORD

BANK

SET

DEMO

MUTE

PAGE

SEQUENCER COUNT

RESET INTRO

PIANO

ANEL MEMORY

TECHNI-CHORD turns your single note melodies into full chords and offers you a choice of different types

from a simple duet which adds one harmony note to your melody note, to big band reeds which adds four

harmony notes to your melody note. If TECHNI-CHORD is part of a ONE TOUCH PLAY or PIANO

STYLIST registration, a suitable TECHNI-CHORD type will be selected automatically.

Example:

Left hand (chord)

Right hand (melody)

1.Split the keyboard into left and right sections.

Type setting

1.Press and hold the TECHNI-CHORD button

for a few seconds.

• The display looks similar to the following.

2.Press the TECHNI-CHORD button to turn it

on.

TECHNI-CHORD

3.Play the keyboard.

• The melody you play with your right hand is automatically

played in chords which are based on the chords you play

with your left hand.

ᮤ

2.Use the , L, M,

ᮣ

buttons to select the har-

• This feature is very effective when used with the AUTO

PLAY CHORD.

mony style.

• When the OCTAVE, HARD ROCK or FANFARE style is

selected, the TECHNI-CHORD functions even when the

keyboard is not split.

Ⅲ ORCHESTRATOR

You can specify which part is used for the har-

mony tones. Your TECHNI-CHORD perfor-

mance is enhanced by selecting harmony

sounds different from the sounds you play and

the sounds produced by the automatic accompa-

niment.

1.Use the ORCHESTRATOR ∧ and ∨ buttons

to select the part for the harmony notes.

• If CONDUCTOR is selected, the harmony notes are pro-

duced in the sounds of the part which is currently

selected in the CONDUCTOR (RIGHT 1, RIGHT 2). In

other words, the harmony notes are produced in the

same sound as the melody notes. If both RIGHT 1 and

RIGHT 2 are on, the harmony notes are produced in the

sound of the RIGHT 1 part.

• In the case of EASY RECORD (see page 58), when set

to a PART other than PART 4, the TECHNI-CHORD

sound is not recorded; so when you use EASY

RECORD, please set to CONDUCTOR or PART 4.

QQTG0701

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Part II Playing the rhythm

Overview of rhythm performance

An explanation follows of the terms related to this instrument’s rhythm performance.

Rhythm and accompaniment

pattern

Rhythm and Style

One rhythm of this instrument is comprised of

four VARIATION patterns, and for each one the

optimum sounds and effects are set.

Each rhythm is comprised of not only a DRUMS

pattern, but also of accompaniment patterns

called BASS and ACCOMP. The combination

of all of these is the rhythm.

All of these together comprise one STYLE.

STYLE

• The accompaniment pattern sounds when you perform

using the AUTO PLAY CHORD (APC). (Refer to page

44.).

RHYTHM

PANEL setting

VARIATION 1

VARIATION 2

VARIATION 3

VARIATION 4

• In the PIANO STYLIST (page 50) and MUSIC STYLE

ARRANGER (page 51) etc. this STYLE is summoned.

Selecting rhythms

AUTO PLA

CHORD

ONE TOUCH

APC/SEQUENCER

VOLUME

FADE

RHYTHM GROUP

TEMPO

PROGRAM

SOUND GROUP

SEQUENCER

SPLIT

POINT

SOUND

FUNK

BALLROOM

SHOW

GUITAR

SAX

ORGAN

SOUND

EASY

REC

PROGRAM

MENUS

DISK

MAIN

MODE

OFF/ON

PLAY

OUT ARRANGER

ROCK

SOUL

DISCO POP BALLAD BALLAD

STRINGS VOCAL HARPSI BRASS WOODWIND ACCORDION SYNTH EXPLORER

PLAY

FAVORITES

DISK

LOAD

VOLUME

MAX

SET

CHORD FINDER

CHORD STEP REC

PIANO

ORCH

CONDUCTOR

RIGHT

DIGITAL

EFFECT

MULTI

EFFECT CHORUS REVERB

WALTZ

TRAD SWING WORLD MEMORY

JAZZ

LATIN

MALLET

DIGITAL

PROGRESSIVE

PIANIST

BEA

16 BEA

USA

BASS ORCH PERC WORLD MIXTURES MIXTURES DRAWBARS DRUM KITS MEMORY

LEFT

RIGHT

PIANO STYLIST

CONTRAST

OFF

MIN

.MEM 5-8

LOAD

BEA

MUSIC STYLE ARRANGER

VARIATION

FILL IN

INTRO

ENDING

SYNCHRO

BREAK

START

STOP

AP TEMPO

TRANSPOSE

PARTS/TR

DISPLAY

HOLD EXIT

GRAND UPRIGHT ELECTRIC MODERN

SIMPLE PIANO

TECHNI-CHORD

BANK

SET

DEMO

MUTE

PAGE

SEQUENCER COUNT

RESET INTRO

PIANO

ANEL MEMORY

Many exciting rhythms are stored in the memory of this instrument. First select one of the rhythm groups

and then choose the desired rhythm.

Select a rhythm

1.In the RHYTHM GROUP section, select a

2.Select the desired rhythm from the list on the

display.

rhythm group.

RHYTHM GROUP

FUNK &

BALLROOM

METRONOME POP

ROCK

SOUL

DISCO POP BALLAD BALLAD & SHOW

WALTZ

JAZZ & LATIN &

8 BEAT 16 BEAT

USA

& TRAD SWING WORLD MEMORY

• If there is more than one page to the display, use the

PAGE buttons to move from one screen page to another.

LOAD

• MEMORY is the group in which you store the rhythms

you create with the COMPOSER. (Refer to page 85.)

QQTG0701

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Part II

Playing the rhythm

Ⅲ VARIATION

Ⅲ Synchronized start

There are four variations available for each

rhythm. Use the VARIATION buttons to select

the desired variation.

With the synchronized start feature, the rhythm

pattern starts when you play a key on the key-

board.

1.Select a rhythm.

2.Press the SYNCHRO & BREAK button to turn

MUSIC STYLE ARRANGER

VARIATION

it on.

SYNCHRO & BREAK

• Confirm that the MUSIC STYLE ARRANGER button is

off. (If it is on, press it once to turn it off.)

• The nuance of the pattern differs with each variation

number.

• You can change to a different variation while the rhythm

is playing.

3.Play a key to the left of the keyboard split

point.

• The rhythm pattern begins to play.

• You can use the synchronized start feature even when

the keyboard is not divided into left and right sections. To

start the rhythm, press a key to the left of the specified

split point.

METRONOME

1.In the RHYTHM GROUP section, select MET-

RONOME.

Ⅲ Adjust the tempo

The tempo of the rhythm pattern is adjusted with

the TEMPO/PROGRAM dial.

• The following display appears.

TEMPO / PROGRAM

2.Select the time signature for the metronome.

• Select “Metronome Off” if you do not wish the first beat of

the measure to be accented.

• The tempo is shown on the display as a numerical value

( q = 40 to 300).

• Press the START/STOP button to start the metronome.

• When the TEMPO/PROGRAM indicator is lit, the

TEMPO/PROGRAM cannot be used to adjust the tempo.

• To adjust the tempo during playback, refer to page 61.

Start the rhythm

Ⅲ TAP TEMPO

There are two ways to start the rhythm.

You can set the tempo of the rhythm by tapping

this button few times with your finger at the

tempo you wish to play.

Ⅲ Normal start

1.Select a rhythm.

TAP TEMPO

2.Press the START/STOP button to turn it on.

BEAT

START / STOP

• The tempo at which the button is tapped is detected, and

the tempo automatically changes correspondingly.

• The selected rhythm pattern immediately begins to play.

• You can stop the rhythm by pressing the START/STOP

button again to turn it off.

• The BEAT indicators above the START/STOP button

light to indicate the beat.

QQTG0701

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Part II

Playing the rhythm

AUTO PLA

CHORD

ONE TOUCH

APC/SEQUENCER

VOLUME

FADE

RHYTHM GROUP

TEMPO

PROGRAM

SOUND GROUP

SEQUENCER

SPLIT

POINT

SOUND

FUNK

BALLROOM

SHOW

GUITAR

SAX

ORGAN

SOUND

EASY

REC

PROGRAM

MENUS

DISK

MAIN

MODE

OFF/ON

PLAY

OUT ARRANGER

ROCK

SOUL

DISCO POP BALLAD BALLAD

STRINGS VOCAL HARPSI BRASS WOODWIND ACCORDION SYNTH EXPLORER

PLAY

FAVORITES

DISK

VOLUME

MAX

SET

CHORD FINDER

LOAD

CHORD STEP REC

PIANO

ORCH

CONDUCTOR

RIGHT

DIGITAL

EFFECT

MULTI

EFFECT CHORUS REVERB

WALTZ

TRAD SWING WORLD MEMORY

JAZZ

LATIN

MALLET

DIGITAL

PROGRESSIVE

PIANIST

BEA

16 BEA

USA

BASS ORCH PERC WORLD MIXTURES MIXTURES DRAWBARS DRUM KITS MEMORY

LEFT

RIGHT

PIANO STYLIST

CONTRAST

OFF

MIN

.MEM 5-8

LOAD

BEA

MUSIC STYLE ARRANGER

VARIATION

FILL IN

INTRO

ENDING

SYNCHRO

BREAK

START

STOP

AP TEMPO

TRANSPOSE

PARTS/TR

DISPLAY

HOLD EXIT

GRAND UPRIGHT ELECTRIC MODERN

SIMPLE PIANO

TECHNI-CHORD

BANK

SET

DEMO

MUTE

PAGE

SEQUENCER COUNT

RESET INTRO

PIANO

ANEL MEMORY

Intro, fill-in and ending patterns fitting each different rhythm pattern are permanently recorded in your PR,

thus allowing a versatile rhythm performance.

Ⅲ Mode setting

You can select the mode for the count sound.

INTRO

Begin the rhythm performance with an intro pat-

tern.

1.Press the MODE button in the AUTO PLAY

CHORD section to turn it on.

1.Press the INTRO & ENDING 1 or INTRO &

AUTO PLAY CHORD

ENDING 2 button to turn it on.

MODE OFF/ON

INTRO & ENDING

CHORD FINDER

• The display looks similar to the following.

2.Press the START/STOP button to start the

rhythm.

BEAT

START / STOP

2.Use the COUNT INTRO button to select a

mode.

• An intro pattern is played, after which the normal rhythm

pattern begins.

VOICE: A spoken count (initialized setting).

CLICK: A clicking sound for the count.

COUNT INTRO

You can begin the rhythm performance with a

spoken one-measure count.

FILL IN

You can insert a fill-in pattern any time during the

rhythm performance. Choose from two different

fill-in patterns.

1.Press the COUNT INTRO (FILL IN 2) button

to turn it on.

1.Select a rhythm and press the START/STOP

button.

FILL IN

2.Press the FILL IN 1 or FILL IN 2 button.

COUNT

INTRO

FILL IN

2.Press the START/STOP button to start the

rhythm.

• A spoken one-measure count is played, after which the

normal rhythm pattern begins.

SEQUENCER COUNT

RESET INTRO

• A fill-in pattern is heard immediately for the remainder of

the measure.

• When a FILL IN button is pressed on the last beat of the

measure, the fill-in pattern continues to the end of the fol-

lowing measure.

QQTG0701

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Part II

Playing the rhythm

2.Press the INTRO & ENDING 1 or INTRO &

ENDING

ENDING 2 button to turn it on.

Finish the rhythm performance with an ending

pattern.

INTRO & ENDING

1.Select a rhythm and press the START/STOP

button.

• An ending pattern is produced, and then the rhythm per-

formance stops.

• If you accidentally press the INTRO & ENDING button in

the middle of the tune, you can press the FILL IN 1 or

FILL IN 2 button. The ending pattern stops, and a fill-in

pattern is produced, after which the normal rhythm per-

formance continues.

Auto Play Chord

AUTO PLA

CHORD

ONE TOUCH

APC/SEQUENCER

VOLUME

FADE

RHYTHM GROUP

TEMPO

PROGRAM

SOUND GROUP

SEQUENCER

SPLIT

POINT

SOUND

FUNK

BALLROOM

SHOW

GUITAR

SAX

ORGAN

SOUND

EASY

REC

PROGRAM

MENUS

DISK

MAIN

MODE

OFF/ON

PLAY

OUT ARRANGER

ROCK

SOUL

DISCO POP BALLAD BALLAD

STRINGS VOCAL HARPSI BRASS WOODWIND ACCORDION SYNTH EXPLORER

PLAY

FAVORITES

DISK

LOAD

VOLUME

MAX

SET

CHORD FINDER

CHORD STEP REC

PIANO

ORCH

CONDUCTOR

RIGHT

DIGITAL

EFFECT

MULTI

EFFECT CHORUS REVERB

WALTZ

TRAD SWING WORLD MEMORY

JAZZ

LATIN

MALLET

DIGITAL

PROGRESSIVE

PIANIST

BEA

16 BEA

USA

BASS ORCH PERC WORLD MIXTURES MIXTURES DRAWBARS DRUM KITS MEMORY

LEFT

RIGHT

PIANO STYLIST

CONTRAST

OFF

MIN

.MEM 5-8

LOAD

BEA

MUSIC STYLE ARRANGER

VARIATION

FILL IN

INTRO

ENDING

SYNCHRO

BREAK

START

STOP

AP TEMPO

TRANSPOSE

PARTS/TR

DISPLAY

HOLD EXIT

GRAND UPRIGHT ELECTRIC MODERN

SIMPLE PIANO

TECHNI-CHORD

BANK

SET

DEMO

MUTE

PAGE

SEQUENCER COUNT

RESET INTRO

PIANO

PANEL MEMORY

Simply by playing a chord on the keyboard, the AUTO PLAY CHORD function automatically plays an

accompaniment pattern which matches perfectly the selected rhythm. With a real accompaniment as a

background, you can concentrate on playing the melody.

How the AUTO PLAY CHORD works

Playing chords

Choose from the 4 ways of playing chords.

Ⅲ BASIC mode

Melody

Chord

This mode lets beginners specify chords with just

one finger. With this mode, chords can be speci-

fied either with one finger <one finger> or by

pressing all of the chord's sound components

<fingered>.

In the <one-finger>, a major chord can be played

just by pressing the key for its root note.

When an AUTO PLAY CHORD mode is

selected, an automatic accompaniment which

matches the rhythm you have chosen is played

in the chord which you specify with your left

hand. The melody is played with your right hand.

• The accompaniment pattern of the AUTO PLAY CHORD

is composed of 8 parts: DRUMS 1, 2, BASS, ACCOMP

1–5.

Example: C chord

• The volume of each part can be adjusted with the buttons

below the display. (Refer to page 27.)

QQTG0701

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Part II

Playing the rhythm

Minor, seventh and minor seventh chords are also easily produced.

minor chord

seventh chord

minor seventh chord

Play the root note plus a Play the root note plus a Play the root note plus a

black key to the left of it.

Example: Cm

white key to the left of it.

Example: C7

black key and a white key to

the left of it.

Example: Cm7

•

When three or more keys of a chord are pressed, it is recognized as a <fingered> chord.

In the <fingered>, you specify the chord by play-

ing all the notes in the chord.

• Play at least three notes to specify the chord.

• If the CHORD FINDER procedure is used, you can see the

types of chords that can be specified and the keys you

press to play them. (Refer to page 47.)

How to use the AUTO PLAY CHORD

Ⅲ ADVANCED 1 mode

This mode accepts chords specified with <fin-

gered> and disregards all unrecognizable chord

specifications.

• It recognizes many more chords than the BASIC mode’s

<fingered> chords.

1.Select the desired rhythm and sound(s), and

set the tempo.

2.Press the AUTO PLAY CHORD’s OFF/ON

button to turn it on.

AUTO PLAY CHORD

Ⅲ ADVANCED 2 mode

This mode accepts chords specified with <fin-

gered> and, for unrecognizable chords, it plays

the auto accompaniment according to the keys

MODE OFF/ON

CHORD FINDER

pressed.

• It recognizes many more chords than the BASIC mode’s

<fingered> chords.

3.Press the AUTO PLAY CHORD’s MODE but-

ton to turn it on.

• The display looks similar to the following.

Ⅲ PIANIST mode

In the PIANIST mode, the entire keyboard can

be used to specify chords <fingered>

(ADVANCE) for the automatic accompaniment; a

RIGHT part is assigned to all the keys, and the

keyboard does not split.

• When specifying chords, if you press a key a perfect 5th or

more below the lowest note of the chord, the BASS part

becomes a pattern based on that note.

4.Select an AUTO PLAY CHORD mode .

• After a few seconds, the display returns to the previous

display.

• If the BASIC or ADVANCED mode was selected, the key-

board automatically splits into right and left sections.

If this function is assigned to the left pedal, for

example, pressing the left pedal will play the cur-

rently specified chord in that timing, allowing you

to focus your performance on a solo melody.

• The accompaniment continues in the same chord as long

as the PEDAL is depressed, and it does not change even if

other chords are played.

5.Press the START/STOP button to begin the

rhythm.

• You can start the rhythm by playing a key on the key-

board. (Refer to page 42.)

• To change the PEDAL assignment, refer to page 120.

(Continued on the next page)

QQTG0701

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Part II

Playing the rhythm

6.Specify a chord.

Ⅲ MEMORY

Press the MEMORY button and select either one

of the following:

• If the BASIC or ADVANCED mode was selected, specify

the chord on the keyboard section to the left of the split

point.

ON:

Even when removing your finger from

the keys, the present chord is retained

until the next chord is specified.

• An accompaniment pattern in the specified chord is auto-

matically played. Play the melody with your right hand.

• When you use FILL IN, INTRO and ENDING, the auto-

matic accompaniment is also used in these patterns.

• You can set the mode which determines how the LEFT

part sounds during an AUTO PLAY CHORD perfor-

mance. (See below.)

• In the initialized condition, when the rhythm is off, if an

AUTO PLAY CHORD mode is on and a chord is speci-

fied, the specified root note (R. BASS part) and chord

notes (CHORD part) are produced. The volumes of these

notes can be adjusted. (Refer to page 27.)

OFF: When removing your finger, the chord

is deleted.

AUTO: The chord is retained when auto

accompaniment is playing but is not

retained when stopped.

Ⅲ ON BASS

If the ON BASS button is ON, the BASS part is

produced in the key of the lowest note of the

played chord, thus making it possible to play

chords such as C on G.

• For example, with the ON BASS button on, if you play a

C chord by pressing the keys G, C and E, the BASS part

is produced in the key of G.

7.To stop the automatic accompaniment, press

the START/STOP button.

• If you wish the automatic accompaniment to begin and

end the performance, set the OFF/ON button to off.

Example of how to play a BASIC <One-Finger> accompaniment

Play the melody with

your right hand.

Left hand

ON:

Left Hold

Specifying <one-finger> chords in the BASIC

mode produces the full chords; otherwise the

LEFT part notes are those of the pressed

This setting determines how the LEFT part

sounds when the LEFT button in the CONDUC-

TOR is on during a performance with the BASIC

or ADVANCED mode.

chord keys.

• When BASIC is selected the LEFT part turns off, but it

will sound if you turn it on.

• Touch response does not function for the LEFT part.

• When the mode is set to ON, during a rhythm perfor-

mance, the LEFT part continues to play even when the

keys are released.

1.Press the MODE button to turn it on.

• The display changes to the following.

APC VOLUME

To adjust the volume balance between the auto-

matic accompaniment and the parts you play

manually on the keyboard, the volume of all the

automatic accompaniment parts can be lowered

as one.

2.Use the LEFT HOLD: ON/OFF button to set

the mode to on or off.

⇒ Use the APC/SEQUENCER VOLUME slide

OFF:

control to adjust the volume.

The LEFT part sounds from the pressed chord

keys.

APC/SEQUENCER

VOLUME

• When BASIC is selected, the LEFT part turns off. The

LEFT part sounds if you turn it on, but <one-finger>

chords cannot be specified.

MAX

OFF

QQTG0701

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Part II

Playing the rhythm

• Use this control to lower the automatic accompaniment

volume when it is too loud relative to your manual perfor-

mance.

• At the MAX position, the volumes of the automatic

accompaniment parts correspond to their current set-

tings; at the OFF position, the volume is 0. The volume

should normally be set to MAX.

• The set values are shown in the APC column of the vol-

ume balance display. (Refer to page 27.)

• The volume can be adjusted for each part. (Refer to page

27.)

• When the position of the slide control coincides with the

actual volume, the indicator is lit. When the volume is

changed by of the PANEL MEMORY or SEQUENCER

playback, the actual volume differs from that indicated by

the position of the slide control. In this case, the indicator

is not lit.

4.Use the ROOT buttons to select the root note

of the chord. Use the TYPE buttons to select

the type of chord.

• A typical way to finger the specified chord (TYPICAL) is

illustrated on a keyboard diagram.

• Each time the INVERSION button is pressed, different

INVERSION fingerings are illustrated in order. (If there is

no INVERSION fingering for the specified chord, this but-

ton is not shown on the display.)

• When the button with a picture of an ear is pressed, the

notes of the chord sound. (The octave of the illustrated

keys and that of the played tones may differ.)

5.To exit the CHORD FINDER procedure, press

the EXIT button.

• During SEQUENCER playback or disk DIRECT PLAY,

operation of this slide control affects the total volume of

all the playback parts.

BREAK function

With the break function, the rhythm starts when

the left keyboard is played and stops when the

fingers are removed from the keys.

CHORD FINDER

The CHORD FINDER can help, for example,

when you do not know which keys to press to

specify a given chord. When you input the chord

name, the CHORD FINDER shows you which

keys to press and even lets you hear the notes

that make up.

1.Select an AUTO PLAY CHORD mode.

• At this time, the MEMORY (APC SELECT) button should

be OFF.

2.Press the SYNCHRO & BREAK button to turn

it on.

1.Press the AUTO PLAY CHORD’s MODE but-

ton to turn it on.

SYNCHRO & BREAK

AUTO PLAY CHORD

MODE OFF/ON

3.Specify a chord.

CHORD FINDER

• The automatic accompaniment begins to play (synchro-

nized start).

• For the PIANIST mode, play the keys to the left of the

currently set split point.

• The display changes to the following.

4.Release the chord keys.

• The automatic accompaniment stops. When the keys are

pressed again, the rhythm starts from the first beat.

2.Select CHORD FINDER.

• The display changes to the following.

3.Use the APC MODE button to select the auto-

matic accompaniment mode you will use to

specify chords (BASIC, ADVANCED 1).

• In the list column are shown the chords which can be

specified in each mode.

QQTG0701

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Part II

Playing the rhythm

Fade In/Fade Out

AUTO PLA

CHORD

ONE TOUCH

APC/SEQUENCER

VOLUME

FADE

RHYTHM GROUP

TEMPO

PROGRAM

SOUND GROUP

SEQUENCER

SPLIT

POINT

SOUND

FUNK

BALLROOM

SHOW

GUITAR

SAX

ORGAN

SOUND

EASY

REC

PROGRAM

MENUS

DISK

MAIN

MODE

OFF/ON

PLAY

OUT ARRANGER

ROCK

SOUL

DISCO POP BALLAD BALLAD

STRINGS VOCAL HARPSI BRASS WOODWIND ACCORDION SYNTH EXPLORER

PLAY

FAVORITES

DISK

VOLUME

MAX

SET

CHORD FINDER

LOAD

CHORD STEP REC

PIANO

ORCH

CONDUCTOR

RIGHT

DIGITAL

EFFECT

MULTI

EFFECT CHORUS REVERB

WALTZ

TRAD SWING WORLD MEMORY

JAZZ

LATIN

MALLET

DIGITAL

PROGRESSIVE

PIANIST

BEA

16 BEA

USA

BASS ORCH PERC WORLD MIXTURES MIXTURES DRAWBARS DRUM KITS MEMORY

LEFT

RIGHT

PIANO STYLIST

CONTRAST

OFF

MIN

.MEM 5-8

LOAD

BEA

MUSIC STYLE ARRANGER

VARIATION

FILL IN

INTRO

ENDING

SYNCHRO

BREAK

START

STOP

AP TEMPO

TRANSPOSE

PARTS/TR

DISPLAY

HOLD EXIT

GRAND UPRIGHT ELECTRIC MODERN

SIMPLE PIANO

TECHNI-CHORD

BANK

SET

DEMO

MUTE

PAGE

SEQUENCER COUNT

RESET INTRO

PIANO

PANEL MEMORY

Add interest to your performance by starting a part with a fade-in or ending it with a fade-out.

FADE IN

FADE SET

At the beginning of the song, the volume of each

part rises slowly.

Adjust the settings for the FADE IN and FADE

OUT.

1.Set up the panel settings for your perform-

ance.

1.Press and hold the FADE IN or FADE OUT

button for a few seconds.

2.Turn on the FADE IN button.

FADE

OUT

FADE

OUT

• The display looks similar to the following.

• The indicator flashes. In this condition, the volumes for all

parts change to 0 and no sound is produced from this

instrument until the FADE IN is turned off or until step 3 is

executed.

3.Play the keyboard or press the START/STOP

button.

2.Use the L and M buttons to select the item.

Use the ∧ and ∨ buttons to change the set-

ting.

• The volume slowly builds to its preset level.

• For the fade-in effect for a rhythm part or when playing

back a SEQUENCER performance, turn on the FADE IN

button before pressing the START/STOP button.

• At the end of the fade-in, the FADE IN indicator goes out.

• During the fade-in, FADE IN is shown in the upper right

part of the normal display.

FADE IN

Time:

Specify the time elapsed between 0 volume

to the set volume (1 measure to 16 mea-

sure).

FADE OUT

Time:

At the end of the song, the volume of each part

gradually fades to nothing.

Specify the time elapsed between the set

volume and 0 volume (1 measure to 16

measure).

1.Start the performance.

Auto Reset:

Specify whether the volume of each part

automatically returns to its specified setting

(ON, OFF).

2.Turn on the FADE OUT button at the point you

want the fade-out to start.

FADE

Rhythm Auto stop:

OUT

Specify whether the rhythm turns off after

fade-out is completed (ON, OFF).

SEQ Auto stop:

Specify whether the SEQUENCER play-

back automatically stops after fade-out is

completed (ON, OFF).

• The volumes of all the parts slowly fade to 0.

• The indicator flashes to show that fade-out is completed,

and then goes out. The volumes for all parts return to

their specified settings.

• The display returns to the previous display a few seconds

after you have changed the settings.

• If you wish to interrupt the fade-out, press the FADE OUT

button to turn it off.

• You can also access this display from the CONTROL

MENU display. (Refer to page 120.)

QQTG0701

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Part II

Playing the rhythm

Sound Arranger

AUTO PLA

CHORD

ONE TOUCH

APC/SEQUENCER

VOLUME

FADE

RHYTHM GROUP

TEMPO

PROGRAM

SOUND GROUP

SEQUENCER

SPLIT

POINT

SOUND

FUNK

BALLROOM

SHOW

GUITAR

SAX

ORGAN

SOUND

EASY

REC

PROGRAM

MENUS

DISK

MAIN

MODE

OFF/ON

PLAY

OUT ARRANGER

ROCK

SOUL

DISCO POP BALLAD BALLAD

STRINGS VOCAL HARPSI BRASS WOODWIND ACCORDION SYNTH EXPLORER

PLAY

FAVORITES

DISK

VOLUME

MAX

SET

CHORD FINDER

LOAD

CHORD STEP REC

PIANO

ORCH

CONDUCTOR

RIGHT

DIGITAL

EFFECT

MULTI

EFFECT CHORUS REVERB

WALTZ

TRAD SWING WORLD MEMORY

JAZZ

LATIN

MALLET

DIGITAL

PROGRESSIVE

PIANIST

BEA

16 BEA

USA

BASS ORCH PERC WORLD MIXTURES MIXTURES DRAWBARS DRUM KITS MEMORY

LEFT

RIGHT

PIANO STYLIST

CONTRAST

OFF

MIN

.MEM 5-8

LOAD

BEA

MUSIC STYLE ARRANGER

VARIATION

FILL IN

INTRO

ENDING

SYNCHRO

BREAK

START

STOP

AP TEMPO

TRANSPOSE

PARTS/TR

DISPLAY

HOLD EXIT

GRAND UPRIGHT ELECTRIC MODERN

SIMPLE PIANO

TECHNI-CHORD

BANK

SET

DEMO

MUTE

PAGE

SEQUENCER COUNT

RESET INTRO

PIANO

PANEL MEMORY

The SOUND ARRANGER feature lets you select other sounds for the AUTO PLAY CHORD parts of

each rhythm.

• For the DRUMS part, select sounds from the DRUM

KITS group.

• The sound and on/off status of the DIGITAL EFFECT are

shown on the display.

1.Select the rhythm whose sound you wish to

change.

• Do not select the METRONOME or the MEMORY button.

• The sounds marked with # cannot be changed.

2.Press and hold the SOUND ARRANGER but-

ton for a few seconds.

5.Repeat steps 3 and 4 for the other parts as

desired.

SOUND

ARRANGER

• Pressing the ORIGINAL button will reset the sounds to

their original settings.

SET

6.When you have finished selecting the sounds,

press the EXIT button.

• This display can also be accessed from the SOUND

• The display looks similar to the following.

MENU display. (Refer to page 101.)

Playing back the sounds

1.Press the SOUND ARRANGER button to turn

it on.

2.Start the rhythm (automatic accompaniment).

3.Use the L and M buttons to select the part

• When the SOUND ARRANGER button is off, the factory-

preset sounds are produced.

whose sound you wish to change.

4.Select the desired sound.

• This setting can be set separately for each rhythm.

• The DIGITAL EFFECT on/off status can also be speci-

fied (except for DRUMS part).

DIGITAL

EFFECT

One Touch Play

AUTO PLA

CHORD

ONE TOUCH

APC/SEQUENCER

VOLUME

FADE

RHYTHM GROUP

TEMPO

PROGRAM

SOUND GROUP

SEQUENCER

SPLIT

POINT

SOUND

FUNK

BALLROOM

SHOW

GUITAR

SAX

ORGAN

SOUND

EASY

REC

PROGRAM

MENUS

DISK

MAIN

MODE

OFF/ON

PLAY

OUT ARRANGER

ROCK

SOUL

DISCO POP BALLAD BALLAD

STRINGS VOCAL HARPSI BRASS WOODWIND ACCORDION SYNTH EXPLORER

PLAY

FAVORITES

DISK

LOAD

VOLUME

MAX

SET

CHORD FINDER

CHORD STEP REC

PIANO

ORCH

CONDUCTOR

RIGHT

DIGITAL

EFFECT

MULTI

EFFECT CHORUS REVERB

WALTZ

TRAD SWING WORLD MEMORY

JAZZ

LATIN

MALLET

DIGITAL

PROGRESSIVE

PIANIST

BEA

16 BEA

USA

BASS ORCH PERC WORLD MIXTURES MIXTURES DRAWBARS DRUM KITS MEMORY

LEFT

RIGHT

PIANO STYLIST

CONTRAST

OFF

MIN

.MEM 5-8

LOAD

BEA

MUSIC STYLE ARRANGER

VARIATION

FILL IN

INTRO

ENDING

SYNCHRO

BREAK

START

STOP

AP TEMPO

TRANSPOSE

PARTS/TR

DISPLAY

HOLD EXIT

GRAND UPRIGHT ELECTRIC MODERN

SIMPLE PIANO

TECHNI-CHORD

BANK

SET

DEMO

MUTE

PAGE

SEQUENCER COUNT

RESET INTRO

PIANO

ANEL MEMORY

ONE TOUCH PLAY automatically sets a suggested combination of sounds and an appropriate tempo for

your chosen rhythm style.

• During setting, the style name is shown on the display.

1.Select a rhythm pattern.

• The AUTO PLAY CHORD and the SYNCHRO & BREAK

are automatically turned on, and the sounds and effects,

volume balances, tempo etc. that are ideal for your

selected rhythm are automatically set.

• Do not select the METRONOME or the MEMORY button.

2.Press and hold the ONE TOUCH PLAY button

for a few seconds.

3.Play the keyboard.

ONE TOUCH

PLAY

• When you specify a chord, the automatic

rhythm begins to play immediately.

QQTG0701

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Part II

Playing the rhythm

Piano Stylist

AUTO PLA

CHORD

ONE TOUCH

APC/SEQUENCER

VOLUME

FADE

RHYTHM GROUP

TEMPO

PROGRAM

SOUND GROUP

SEQUENCER

SPLIT

POINT

SOUND

FUNK

BALLROOM

SHOW

GUITAR

SAX

ORGAN

SOUND

EASY

REC

PROGRAM

MENUS

DISK

MAIN

MODE

OFF/ON

PLAY

OUT ARRANGER

ROCK

SOUL

DISCO POP BALLAD BALLAD

STRINGS VOCAL HARPSI BRASS WOODWIND ACCORDION SYNTH EXPLORER

PLAY

FAVORITES

DISK

VOLUME

MAX

SET

CHORD FINDER

LOAD

CHORD STEP REC

PIANO

ORCH

CONDUCTOR

RIGHT

DIGITAL

EFFECT

MULTI

EFFECT CHORUS REVERB

WALTZ

TRAD SWING WORLD MEMORY

JAZZ

LATIN

MALLET

DIGITAL

PROGRESSIVE

PIANIST

BEA

16 BEA

USA

BASS ORCH PERC WORLD MIXTURES MIXTURES DRAWBARS DRUM KITS MEMORY

LEFT

RIGHT

PIANO STYLIST

CONTRAST

OFF

MIN

.MEM 5-8

LOAD

BEA

MUSIC STYLE ARRANGER

VARIATION

FILL IN

INTRO

ENDING

SYNCHRO

BREAK

START

STOP

AP TEMPO

TRANSPOSE

PARTS/TR

DISPLAY

HOLD EXIT

GRAND UPRIGHT ELECTRIC MODERN

SIMPLE PIANO

TECHNI-CHORD

BANK

SET

DEMO

MUTE

PAGE

SEQUENCER COUNT

RESET INTRO

PIANO

ANEL MEMORY

This feature automatically launches the appropriate instrument settings when you select the style of the

arrangement you wish to play in. By using this feature, you can easily achieve a performance like that of a

first-rate pianist.

PIANO STYLES

Select a suitable style for your performance

based principally on the piano sound.

6.Play the keyboard.

• When you specify a chord on the left area of the key-

board, the automatic accompaniment begins to play.

• You can use the TEMPO/PROGRAM dial to adjust the

tempo.

1.Press the PIANO STYLIST button to turn it on.

7.When you are finished selecting the style, turn

PIANO STYLIST

the PIANO STYLIST button off.

ENSEMBLE STYLES

• The display looks similar to the following.

Select a style suitable for an ensemble perfor-

mance that uses the many sounds and rhythms

incorporated in this instrument.

1.On the PIANO STYLIST display, press the

ENSEMBLE STYLES button.

• The display looks similar to the following.

2.Press the PIANO STYLES button.

• The display looks similar to the following.

2.Use the GROUP button the select a style

group.

• These are the same as the groups for the RHYTHM

GROUP button.

3.Use the ARRANGE MODE button to select

the desired type of arrangement.

• Select the type you wish to play (PIANO SOLO/PIANO &

COMBO/PIANO & ENSEMBLE).

3.Use the RHYTHM button to select a rhythm,

and the STYLE button to select a style.

• The AUTO PLAY CHORD and SYNCHRO & BREAK

turn on, and the sounds, effects, rhythm, tempo, volume

balance etc. which are best suited for the selected music

style are automatically selected.

4.Use the SELECT MODE button to specify how

you wish to select a style.

GENRE: Select a style by musical genre.

ERA: Select a style by era.

4.Play the keyboard.

ALPHABET: Select a style from an alphabetical list.

• When you specify a chord on the left area of the key-

board, the automatic accompaniment immediately begins

to play.

5.Use the GENRE/ERA/ALPHABET button

below the display to select a group. Use the

• You can use the TEMPO/PROGRAM dial to adjust the

tempo.

STYLE button to select a style.

• In the above example, GENRE was selected.

• If the list covers more than one screen “page,” the MORE

button is shown on the display. Use the MORE button to

switch between screen pages.

5.When you are finished selecting the style, turn

the PIANO STYLIST button off.

• The AUTO PLAY CHORD and SYNCHRO & BREAK

turn on, and the sounds, effects, rhythm, tempo, volume

balance, etc. which are best suited for the selected music

style are automatically selected.

QQTG0701

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Part II

Playing the rhythm

AUTO PLA

CHORD

ONE TOUCH

APC/SEQUENCER

VOLUME

FADE

RHYTHM GROUP

TEMPO

PROGRAM

SOUND GROUP

SEQUENCER

Music Style Arranger

SPLIT

POINT

SOUND

FUNK

BALLROOM

SHOW

GUITAR

SAX

ORGAN

SOUND

EASY

REC

PROGRAM

MENUS

DISK

MAIN

MODE

OFF/ON

PLAY

OUT ARRANGER

ROCK

SOUL

DISCO POP BALLAD BALLAD

STRINGS VOCAL HARPSI BRASS WOODWIND ACCORDION SYNTH EXPLORER

PLAY

FAVORITES

DISK

VOLUME

MAX

SET

CHORD FINDER

LOAD

CHORD STEP REC

PIANO

ORCH

CONDUCTOR

RIGHT

DIGITAL

EFFECT

MULTI

EFFECT CHORUS REVERB

WALTZ

TRAD SWING WORLD MEMORY

JAZZ

LATIN

MALLET

DIGITAL

PROGRESSIVE

PIANIST

BEA

16 BEA

USA

BASS ORCH PERC WORLD MIXTURES MIXTURES DRAWBARS DRUM KITS MEMORY

LEFT

RIGHT

PIANO STYLIST

CONTRAST

OFF

MIN

.MEM 5-8

LOAD

BEA

MUSIC STYLE ARRANGER

VARIATION

FILL IN

INTRO

ENDING

SYNCHRO

BREAK

START

STOP

AP TEMPO

TRANSPOSE

PARTS/TR

DISPLAY

HOLD EXIT

GRAND UPRIGHT ELECTRIC MODERN

SIMPLE PIANO

TECHNI-CHORD

BANK

SET

DEMO

MUTE

PAGE

SEQUENCER COUNT

RESET INTRO

PIANO

ANEL MEMORY

The MUSIC STYLE ARRANGER helps you to make professional registration changes during your perfor-

mance. Select between four contrasting registrations at the push of a button, or let your instrument

change the registration automatically for you when you use FILL IN 1 or 2. The MUSIC STYLE

ARRANGER will also alter the accompaniment in character with the registration change creating a pol-

ished sounding arrangement.

• Each time the FILL IN 1 button is pressed, the FILL IN 1

How to use the MUSIC STYLE

pattern plays, and then the music style changes in the 4

➝ 3 ➝ 2 ➝ 1 order. And each time the FILL IN 2 button is

pressed, the FILL IN 2 pattern plays, and then the style

changes in the 1 ➝ 2 ➝ 3 ➝ 4 order.

ARRANGER

1.Select a rhythm pattern.

• Do not select the METRONOME or the MEMORY button.

Ⅲ MUSIC STYLE ARRANGER mode

You can define which panel settings change by

pressing a FILL IN button when the MUSIC

2.Press the MUSIC STYLE ARRANGER button

to turn it on.

STYLE ARRANGER is used.

MUSIC STYLE ARRANGER

1.Press and hold the MUSIC STYLE AR-

RANGER button for a few seconds.

• The display changes to the following.

3.Use the VARIATION buttons to select a style

(1 to 4).

MUSIC STYLE ARRANGER

VARIATION

2.Select the mode.

• The nuance of the pattern differs with each number.

• The panel settings (including the tempo) change accord-

ing to the selected rhythm and music style. The AUTO

PLAY CHORD, the MEMORY and the SYNCHRO &

BREAK button are automatically turned on. When a key

on the left section of the keyboard is pressed, the auto-

matic rhythm begins to play immediately.

RHYTHM:

Only the rhythm changes.

SOUND & RHYTHM:

The sound, effects, rhythms, etc. change.

• During your performance, the style can be changed, but

the tempo does not change.

PANEL MEMORY:

The PANEL MEMORY number (BANK A: 1 to

4) changes. You can store your desired panel

settings in the PANEL MEMORY beforehand

and switch from one to another quickly.

• After a few seconds, the display exits the setting mode.

• You can also access this setting display from the CON-

TROL MENU display. (Refer to page 120.)

How to change the music style

during your performance

While you are playing the keyboard with the

MUSIC STYLE ARRANGER on, press the FILL

IN 1 or FILL IN 2 button.

FILL IN

SEQUENCER COUNT

RESET INTRO

QQTG0701

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Part II

Playing the rhythm

AUTO PLA

CHORD

ONE TOUCH

APC/SEQUENCER

VOLUME

FADE

RHYTHM GROUP

TEMPO

PROGRAM

SOUND GROUP

SEQUENCER

Panel Memory

SPLIT

POINT

SOUND

FUNK

BALLROOM

SHOW

GUITAR

SAX

ORGAN

SOUND

EASY

PROGRAM

MENUS

DISK

MAIN

MODE

OFF/ON

PLAY

OUT ARRANGER

ROCK

SOUL

DISCO POP BALLAD BALLAD

STRINGS VOCAL HARPSI BRASS WOODWIND ACCORDION SYNTH EXPLORER

PLAY

REC

VORITES

DISK

VOLUME

MAX

SET

CHORD FINDER

LOAD

CHORD STEP REC

WALTZ

TRAD SWING WORLD MEMORY

JAZZ

LATIN

MALLET

PIANO

ORCH

DIGITAL

CONDUCTOR

RIGHT

DIGITAL

EFFECT

MULTI

EFFECT CHORUS REVERB

PROGRESSIVE

PIANIST

BEA

16 BEA

USA

BASS ORCH PERC WORLD MIXTURES MIXTURES DRAWBARS DRUM KITS MEMORY

LEFT

RIGHT

PIANO STYLIST

CONTRAST

OFF

MIN

.MEM 5-8

LOAD

BEAT

MUSIC STYLE ARRANGER

ARIATION

FILL IN

INTRO

ENDING

SYNCHRO

BREAK

START

STOP

TAP TEMPO

TRANSPOSE

PARTS/TR

DISPLAY

HOLD EXIT

GRAND UPRIGHT ELECTRIC MODERN

SIMPLE PIANO

TECHNI-CHORD

BANK

SET

DEMO

MUTE

PAGE

SEQUENCER COUNT

RESET INTRO

PIANO

ANEL MEMORY

PANEL MEMORY stores all the current panel settings so you can recall them at the push of a button.

• You can use the bank names on PAGE 1/2 to select the

bank.

How to store the panel settings

By storing all the panel settings you use for a

song in the same bank, for example, you can

switch from one panel setup to the next in a

flash.

Assign a name to the bank/memory

You can assign names to the banks and memo-

ries.

1.Set up the desired panel settings (sounds, vol-

umes, etc.)

1.Select one of the numbered buttons marked

PANEL MEMORY and hold it down for sev-

eral seconds.

2.Use the BANK button to select a bank (A, B,

C).

BANK

SET

• Lighting up both the A and B indicators enables C to be

selected.

2.Press the BANK NAMING button to assign a

name to the bank, or the MEMORY NAMING

button for the memory.

3.With the SET button held down, press one of

the numbered buttons of the PANEL

MEMORY (1 to 8).

• The display looks similar to the following.

P.MEM 5-8

BANK

SET

1 / 5

2 / 6

3 / 7

4 / 8

PANEL MEMORY

3.Use the buttons below the display to assign a

name.

• Turning the P.MEM 5-8 button ON enables the selection

of panel settings for numbers 5 to 8.

• The panel settings are now stored in the specified bank

and number.

• Set the character input position with the POSITION but-

tons, select the characters with the alphanumeric buttons

and repeat name assignment.

• Switch from upper to lower case letters with the ABC, abc

button.

• Use the !#$ button to switch to the symbols character set.

• Press the INS button to enter a space at the cursor posi-

tion.

• Press the DEL button to erase the character at the cursor

position.

• Press the CLR button to erase the entire name.

• Press the →← button to center the name.

Ⅲ BANK VIEW

Select one of the numbered buttons marked

PANEL MEMORY and hold it down for several

seconds to check the 8 memory names of the

selected bank.

4.When you have finished assigning the name,

press the OK button.

^{• You can use the BANK}∧ ^and∨ ^{buttons to view other}

banks.

QQTG0701

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Part II

Playing the rhythm

2.Use the ∧ and ∨ buttons to select the item.

Recall the panel setup

1.Use the BANK button to select a bank (A, B,

3.Use the ON and OFF buttons to store the on

or off status for the selected item.

C).

2.Press the desired PANEL MEMORY number

button (1 to 8).

• Turning the P.MEM 5-8 button ON enables the selection

of panel settings for numbers 5 to 8.

• The panel setup changes to the one stored in the speci-

fied memory.

• You can then change the sound settings, etc. manually;

however, the contents of the memory remain unchanged

until you store them again.

• The currently selected bank, memory number and mem-

ory name are shown in the top line on the normal display.

PANEL MEMORY mode

You can define which panel settings are recalled

when the PANEL MEMORY is used.

1.Press and hold the SET button for a few sec-

onds.

• The display changes to the following.

2.Select the mode.

NORMAL:

The sounds and volume balance, and CON-

DUCTOR status are stored.

EXPAND:

All the instrument’s settings are stored, includ-

ing the rhythm (except for SOUND ARRANGER

on/off status), TRANSPOSE, tempo, etc.

• After a few seconds, the display exits the setting mode.

Ⅲ EXPAND MODE FILTER

You can specify which data is stored in the

EXPAND mode.

1.Use the PAGE buttons to access the PAGE

2/3–3/3 EXPAND MODE FILTER display.

• The display looks similar to the following.

QQTG0701

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Part III Sequencer

Outline of the Sequencer

AUTO PLA

CHORD

ONE TOUCH

APC/SEQUENCER

VOLUME

FADE

RHYTHM GROUP

TEMPO

PROGRAM

SOUND GROUP

SEQUENCER

SPLIT

SOUND

FUNK

BALLROOM

SHOW

GUITAR

SAX

ORGAN

SOUND

EASY

PROGRAM

MENUS

DISK

MAIN

POINT

MODE

OFF/ON

PLAY

OUT ARRANGER

ROCK

SOUL

DISCO POP BALLAD BALLAD

STRINGS VOCAL HARPSI BRASS WOODWIND ACCORDION SYNTH EXPLORER

PLAY

REC

VORITES

DISK

LOAD

VOLUME

MAX

SET

CHORD FINDER

CHORD STEP REC

WALTZ

TRAD SWING WORLD MEMORY

JAZZ

LATIN

MALLET

PIANO

ORCH

DIGITAL

CONDUCTOR

RIGHT

DIGITAL

EFFECT

MULTI

EFFECT CHORUS REVERB

PROGRESSIVE

PIANIST

BEAT

16 BEAT

USA

BASS ORCH PERC WORLD MIXTURES MIXTURES DRAWBARS DRUM KITS MEMORY

LEFT

RIGHT

PIANO STYLIST

CONTRAST

OFF

MIN

P.MEM 5-8

LOAD

BEAT

MUSIC STYLE ARRANGER

VARIATION

FILL IN

INTRO

ENDING

SYNCHRO

BREAK

START

STOP

TAP TEMPO

TRANSPOSE

PARTS/TR

DISPLAY

HOLD EXIT

GRAND UPRIGHT ELECTRIC MODERN

SIMPLE PIANO

TECHNI-CHORD

BANK

SET

DEMO

MUTE

PAGE

SEQUENCER COUNT

RESET INTRO

PIANO

PANEL MEMORY

A sequencer records your performance in a similar way to a tape recorder. This instrument’s

SEQUENCER allows you to record up to 10 performances in a variety of ways. You may want to record

your entire performance in one go (especially if you are using AUTO PLAY CHORD to provide the

accompaniment), or to build up a complex arrangement with several different parts playing together, like

an orchestral score. This instrument’s SEQUENCER has 16 tracks. This means that you can record 16

different parts. However, you don’t have to use all 16 tracks. For some uses you may only need to use

one or two tracks. This instrument’s SEQUENCER enables you to edit your recorded performance. Unlike

a tape recorder you can change the sound or the tempo during playback, or correct wrong notes or timing

errors.

SEQUENCER features

Popular features

Ⅲ You can change the tempo without

changing the pitch

Ⅲ Simplified recording method

EASY RECORD is a feature that allows you to

bypass the more complex recording procedures

so you can record and play back your perform-

ance quickly and easily.

• You can also record an accompaniment from the AUTO

PLAY CHORD.

When you record your performance at a slow

tempo and play it back at a faster tempo, the

pitch stays the same.

Ⅲ Consistent sound

Your performance is reproduced by a sound

module as it reads digital data. So, unlike a

recorded tape, the sound never deteriorates no

matter how many times you play back your per-

formance.

Ⅲ Create a one-man ensemble

Use the REALTIME RECORD function to record

your performance in up to 16 tracks and create

your own orchestra or band.

Ⅲ Store individual data to create your song

For repeating patterns or those especially com-

plicated phrases, the STEP RECORD feature is

convenient for recording the notes one-by-one.

Ⅲ Edit your recorded performance

Comprehensive editing functions allow you to

modify your recorded performance. Data can

easily be erased, corrected or copied, providing

an especially convenient tool for creating your

original tunes.

Memory capacity

Up to 10 songs can be stored in the

SEQUENCER. Expressed in terms of notes, the

total number of notes which can be stored in all

the SEQUENCER songs and tracks is about

40,000. The remaining memory available for

recording is shown on the display as a percent-

Ⅲ Instant search

A recorded tape has to be rewound, but digital

action means you can return to the beginning of

your performance, or find any measure, instantly.

age (MEMORY= %).

• When “Memory full!” appears on the display, no more

data can be stored in the SEQUENCER.

QQTG0701

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Part III

Sequencer

SEQUENCER menu

The configuration of the SEQUENCER setting

display is as follows.

1.Press the PROGRAM MENUS button to turn it

on.

PROGRAM

MENUS

• The display looks similar to the following.

2.Select SEQUENCER.

• The display looks similar to the following.

^{• The SONG}∧ ^and∨ ^{buttons are used to select a song.}

• You can press the NAMING button and assign a name to

the song. (Refer to page 63.)

• You can press the PANEL WRITE button to store the cur-

rent settings of the instrument at the beginning of the

song. (Refer to page 63.)

3.Select RECORD & EDIT, COPY & PASTE or

RANGE EDIT, and follow the corresponding

procedure.

QQTG0701

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Part III

Sequencer

Summary of the SEQUENCER menu items

RECORD & EDIT

TRACK MERGE (page 76)

These functions are recording and editing

operations used for creating a new perfor-

mance.

Merge the recorded contents of two tracks

and store in a third track.

TRACK CLEAR (page 72)

REALTIME RECORD (page 59)

Erase the contents of a specific track.

Record each part of your performance just

as you play it on the keyboard.

SONG CLEAR (page 72)

Erase all the recorded data of a song.

PUNCH RECORD (page 64)

Correct a selected portion of your recorded

performance.

MEASURE COPY (page 76)

Copy the contents of specific measures.

MEASURE ERASE (page 76)

STEP RECORD (page 65)

Erase the contents of specific measures.

Store the sounds note-by-note on the dis-

MEASURE DELETE (page 77)

Delete specific measures from the perfor-

mance.

play.

• You can also store the chord, control or rhythm pro-

gression for the AUTO PLAY CHORD.

TRACK ASSIGN (page 70)

Assign parts to tracks.

MEASURE INSERT (page 77)

Insert additional measures in the perfor-

mance.

QUANTIZE (page 71)

Correct the timing of your performance.

APC TO SMF CONVERT (page 78)

Save automatic accompaniment patterns

data in a Standard MIDI File (SMF).

SONG SELECT (page 64)

Select a song.

SONG CLEAR (page 72)

RANGE EDIT

Change the note position etc. in the recorded

data.

Erase all the recorded data of a song.

TRACK CLEAR (page 72)

Erase the contents of a specific track.

QUANTIZE (page 71)

NOTE EDIT (page 73)

Correct the timing of your performance.

Store and correct performance (NOTE)

data on a piano roll display.

NOTE CHANGE (page 78)

Change the pitch of specific notes.

DRUM EDIT (page 74)

VELOCITY CHANGE (page 79)

Store and correct DRUMS part data on a

special display.

Modify the recorded velocity (how hard the

keyboard was played) of performance data.

TRANSPOSE (page 79)

COPY & PASTE

Copy recording data and paste it to the

desired location.

Change the key of the performance data.

ADVANCE/DELAY (page 79)

Speed up or delay the sound production of

performance data.

TRACK COPY (page 75)

Copy data of specific tracks.

SONG COPY (page 75)

Copy data of specific songs.

About the measure count

The measure count on the display corresponds to the time signature of the selected rhythm. However,

if rhythm data is stored in the RHYTHM part and that part is played back, the measure count on the dis-

play corresponds to the stored rhythm data. (Refer to page 69.)

•

If you wish to use a time signature not available in the preset rhythms, use the COMPOSER to create a new time signature.

(Refer to page 82.)

QQTG0701

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Part III

Sequencer

Sequencer parts

The following summary explains what is stored in each SEQUENCER part.

Part name

[name on display]

Used for

Recorded contents

RIGHT1 [RT1]

RIGHT2 [RT2]

LEFT [LFT]

PART1 [P 1]

–PART9 [P 9]

PART11 [P 11]

–PART16 [P16]

Recording the perform-

ance of each part

(REALTIME/STEP)

• Sound and volume settings

• PART EXPRESSION

• Contents of sound and effect settings that can be set

on the MIXER display (Refer to page 104.)

• PITCH BEND, MODULATION data

• Pedal operation

DRUMS [DRM]

(PART 10)

Recording the drums

performance with the

DRUM KITS group

sounds (REAL-

• Sound and volume settings

• PART EXPRESSION

• Contents of sound and effect settings that can be set

on the MIXER display (Refer to page 104.)

TIME/STEP)

CONTROL [CTL]

Recording changes in

the panel button status

(REALTIME/STEP)

• Rhythm setting and selection changes

• RHYTHM VARIATION 1–4 setting

• REVERB on/off

• AUTO PLAY CHORD status, volume balance

• MUSIC STYLE ARRANGER status

• FILL IN 1, 2, INTRO & ENDING 1, 2 on

• PANEL MEMORY selection changes

• TRANSPOSE status

• TECHNI-CHORD status

• START/STOP on/off

• TEMPO setting

• CONDUCTOR status

• FADE IN/OUT operation

• TOTAL EXPRESSION

AUTO PLAY CHORD

[APC]

Recording chords for the • Chord progression

AUTO PLAY CHORD

• AUTO PLAY CHORD status, volume balance

(REALTIME)

• START/STOP on/off

• FILL IN 1, 2, INTRO & ENDING 1, 2 on

CHORD [CHD]

Recording chord

progression for the

AUTO PLAY CHORD

(STEP)

• Chord progression

• FILL IN 1, 2, INTRO & ENDING 1, 2 on

RHYTHM [RHY]

Settings related to

rhythm (STEP)

• Rhythm settings and selection changes

• RHYTHM VARIATION 1–4 setting

• FILL IN 1, 2, INTRO & ENDING 1, 2 on

• START/STOP on/off

• TEMPO setting

•

You can use the TRACK ASSIGN function to assign parts to tracks as you wish. (Refer to page 70.)

Those items above which are not operations available with this instrument can be recorded only from MIDI input.

QQTG0701

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Part III

Sequencer

Easy Record

Suppose you are playing your instrument and you wish to record and play back your performance to hear

how it sounds. You can bypass the set-up procedures of the full-scale sequencer and begin recording

quickly and easily.

•

Note that by executing EASY REC, the original data in the selected song number is erased.

Recording procedure

1.Press the EASY REC button to turn it on.

4.Press the OK button.

• The display changes to the REALTIME RECORD dis-

play.

SEQUENCER

EASY

REC

PLAY

5.Play the keyboard.

• Recording begins as soon as you start the rhythm or play

the keyboard.

CHORD STEP REC

6.When you have finished recording, press the

• The display changes to the following.

EASY REC button to turn it off.

• The PLAY button turns on.

2.Use the SONG ∧ and ∨ buttons to select the

song number in which to record (1 to 10).

• If you press the NAMING button, you can assign a name

to your song. (Refer to page 63.)

3.Set the desired sounds, effects, rhythms, etc.

Playback

1.Press the SEQUENCER RESET (FILL IN 1)

button.

FILL IN

SEQUENCER

RESET

2.Press the START/STOP button.

• Your recorded performance is played back automatically.

• When you are finished playing back your performance,

press the SEQUENCER PLAY button to turn it off.

QQTG0701

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Part III

Sequencer

Realtime Record

With REALTIME RECORD, your performance is recorded with the timing exactly as you played it on the

keyboard. Use this mode to record your performance in up to 16 tracks and create your own orchestra or

band.

Recording procedure

• The display looks similar to the following.

1.Press the PROGRAM MENUS button to turn it

on.

• The display changes to the following.

6.Use the buttons below the display to turn on

the “REC” indication above the track numbers

you are going to record.

2.Select SEQUENCER.

• While you are recording, you can play back tracks which

• The display looks similar to the following.

are already recorded. Press the corresponding balance

buttons to display “PLAY” above the track number you

wish to have played back.

• For the RIGHT 1, RIGHT 2 and LEFT parts, you can

select two or more tracks to record at one time; however,

to record a performance part, the corresponding button in

the CONDUCTOR must also be on. For parts that are not

in the CONDUCTOR, multiple parts cannot be recorded

at one time.

• To record AUTO PLAY CHORD (APC) parts, turn on the

AUTO PLAY CHORD’s OFF/ON button. In this case,

• When you press the PANEL WRITE button, the PANEL

press the START/STOP button when beginning record-

WRITE display appears. To store the currently active set-

ing.

tings, such as the sounds, at the beginning of the song,

press the OK button.

• The track for the RHYTHM (RHY) part can be selected

for recording only when STEP RECORD is active.

3.Use the SONG ∧ and ∨ buttons to select a

song number in which to record. (The song

number is shown on the display.)

7.Set the sounds, effects, volumes, etc. for the

parts you are going to record.

• If you press the MIXER button, you can use the MIXER

display to visually adjust the settings for each track.

• The LOCAL ON/OFF setting on the MIXER display is

used to specify whether the part assigned to that track

sounds when it is played on the keyboard during record-

ing. For the LOCAL ON/OFF during playback, use the

TRACK ASSIGN display to adjust the settings. (Refer to

page 70.)

4.Select RECORD & EDIT.

• The display looks similar to the following.

• If you are recording GM2 song data, select from the GM2

group in the SOUND EXPLORER.

• The panel settings which are active at the beginning of

recording are stored.

8.Use the TEMPO/PROGRAM to adjust the

5.Select REALTIME RECORD.

recording tempo.

• The tempo is shown on the display as q =.

• If you wish to record the tempo setting and tempo

changes, store them in the control (CTL) part, or use the

step record to store them in the rhythm (RHY) part.

9.Turn the metronome on or off as desired with

the ON/OFF button at the upper right of the

display.

• The metronome selection alternates between ON and

OFF each time the button is pressed.

• When set to ON, the metronome volume setting display is

momentarily shown.

• The metronome sound is not recorded.

(Continued on the next page)

QQTG0701

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Part III

Sequencer

10.Play the keyboard.

CYCLE RECORD

• Recording begins.

This mode allows you to have specified record-

ing measures continuously repeated. Thus you

can record measures by adding notes during any

cycle.

• You can also press the START/STOP button to start the

rhythm and begin recording.

• If the metronome is on, when you press the

START/STOP button, a two-measure count plays, after

which recording automatically begins. In this case, the

rhythm does not start. Recording does not start until the

two-measure count is completed.

• The recording status is continuously updated on the dis-

play:

MEASURE= indicates the current measure.

TIME SIG.= indicates the current time signature.

MEMORY= indicates the remaining memory (%) avail-

able for recording.

1.On the REALTIME RECORD display, specify

“REC” for a track number you are going to

record, and “PLAY” for track numbers you

wish to have played back.

2.Press the CYCLE: OFF button.

• The display looks similar to the following.

• If you wish to redo the recording, press the REC STOP

button and then record again. To change the sounds and

effects, etc. please set them again.

• If you make a mistake in recording, you can correct a

specific portion of your performance without having to

redo the whole part. (Refer to page 64.)

11.When you have finished recording, press the

REC STOP button on the display, or turn off

3.Use the START MEASURE ∧ and ∨ buttons

the PROGRAM MENUS button.

to specify the beginning measure number.

• When the PROGRAM MENUS button is turned off, the

ending command (END) is recorded. Note that, as long

as the ending command is not recorded, blank recording

continues even if you stop playing.

4.Use the END MEASURE ∧ and ∨ buttons to

specify the ending measure number.

• The measure in which the END command has been

stored can also be specified.

• The SEQUENCER PLAY button turns on.

START

END

Ⅲ Multi-track recording

Use the following procedure to record one track

while listening to the track or tracks already

recorded.

CYCLE END MEASURE: 4

1.Follow the procedure to record the first track,

and press the REC STOP button at the end of

the recording.

• The indication for the track just recorded changes from

“REC” to “PLAY”.

5.Press the START/STOP button.

• If the metronome is on, cycle recording of the specified

measures begins after a two-measure count.

6.Play the keyboard.

• The specified measures are repeated, during which time

you can record by adding notes little by little at the correct

timing (over-dubbing).

2.Turn on the “REC” indication for the track you

wish to record next, and select the sounds and

effects, etc.

• If you wish to erase all the performance data from the

specified measures, press the CLEAR button.

• If the CYCLE: ON button is pressed, it changes to OFF.

This button does not function during recording.

• To return to the REALTIME RECORD display, press the

EXIT button.

• Cycle record can also be started from the REALTIME

RECORD display whenever the CYCLE: ON indication is

shown.

3.Press the START/STOP button and begin

recording.

• Tracks for which “PLAY” is shown are played back, and

you can record in time with this.

• If you turn on the “REC” for the CONTROL track and

begin recording, the rhythm start will not be recorded.

7.When you have finished recording, press the

REC STOP button on the display, or turn off

the PROGRAM MENUS button.

4.Press the REC STOP button at the end of the

recording.

5.Repeat steps 2 to 4 for other tracks, as

desired.

6.When multi-track recording is finished, turn off

the PROGRAM MENUS button.

• If you wish to store part settings that you modified after

recording as beginning song data, press the MIXER but-

ton and follow the PANEL WRITE procedure. (Refer to

page 63.)

QQTG0701

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Part III

Sequencer

Sequencer Play

Play back your recorded performance.

1.Press the SEQUENCER PLAY button to turn

5.If you want to playback a song starting from a

point other than the first measure, use the

MEAS ∧ and ∨ buttons to specify the measure

number.

it on.

SEQUENCER

EASY

REC

PLAY

• “MEASURE=” indicates the current measure number.

6.Press the START/STOP button.

• The recorded performance is played back from the speci-

fied measure.

CHORD STEP REC

• When playback is begun from a measure in which an

INTRO, COUNT INTRO, FILL IN or ENDING is recorded,

the corresponding function does not work.

• You can press the MIXER button and modify the settings

for each part.

• The display looks similar to the following.

• For information about LYRICS, refer to page 91.

7.To stop playback, press the START/STOP

button.

• If the START/STOP button is pressed again, playback

will continue from the point it was interrupted.

2.After pressing the SONG button, use the

SONG ∧ and ∨ buttons to select a song num-

ber for playback.

8.When you are finished playing back your per-

formance, press the SEQUENCER PLAY but-

ton to turn it off.

3.Use the balance buttons below the display to

show “PLAY” above the track numbers you

wish to have played back.

• Highlighted track numbers indicate tracks that are

already recorded. Only highlighted track numbers can be

selected for playback.

If a rhythm progression has been recorded in

the RHYTHM (RHY) part, the MEASURE dis-

play used in the STEP RECORD and EDIT

displays conforms to the time signature data

stored in the RHYTHM part.

• You can select two or more tracks to play back at one

time.

4.Press the SEQUENCER RESET (FILL IN 1)

button.

• The SEQUENCER returns to the beginning of the song

and the beginning panel settings are recalled.

Adjusting the playback tempo

Even with a song having recorded tempo data, you can use TEMPO/PROGRAM or TAP TEMPO to

adjust the tempo to your liking.

• When the tempo is changed, all the tempo data of that song is automatically changed by the same ratio. Accordingly, even in

song data in which tempo change data is stored, a single adjustment of the tempo produces a natural-sounding playback.

• To return to the original tempo, while the song is stopped press the SEQUENCER RESET button. Note that the tempo

change is also canceled when you switch to another song or load a new song.

• The adjusted tempo is canceled when you begin the recording procedure and the original tempo data will be recorded.

QQTG0701

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Part III

Sequencer

• The display looks similar to the following.

CYCLE PLAY

You can have specified measures played back

repeatedly.

1.On the SEQUENCER PLAY display, specify

“PLAY” for track numbers you wish to have

played back.

2.Press the CYCLE button.

2.Specify the order of songs in the medley.

• If ALL is pressed, all the files are selected, and the songs

are played back in order in a medley. If ALL is pressed

again, the files are deselected.

• The display looks similar to the following.

• You can use the buttons below the display to select a

song to add to the song list, then press the ADD button to

add it to the list. Repeat these steps to create your own

list of songs to have played back. M01, M02 etc. next to

the file name indicates its order in the list.

• You can delete a marked file from the medley song list by

selecting it and pressing the ADD button.

• Use the LOOP button to specify ON or OFF for repeat

playback of the medley.

3.Use the START MEASURE ∧ and ∨ buttons

to specify the beginning measure number.

3.Press the START button.

4.Use the END MEASURE ∧ and ∨ buttons to

• During medley playback, you can use the SKIP button to

skip to the next song.

specify the ending measure number.

• The measure in which the END command has been

stored can also be specified.

START

END

SEQUENCER VOLUME

When playing the keyboard along with a

recorded performance, you can adjust the total

volume of all the playback parts as one.

CYCLE END MEASURE: 4

5.Press the START/STOP button.

⇒ Use the APC/SEQUENCER VOLUME slide

• Cycle playback of the specified measures begins.

• Normally the rhythm pattern is not played back.

control to adjust the volume.

APC/SEQUENCER

VOLUME

6.To stop cycle playback, press the START/

STOP button again.

MAX

OFF

• During playback stop, if the SEQUENCER RESET (FILL

IN 1) button is pressed, the SEQUENCER returns to the

measure number specified in step 3. If the SEQUENCER

RESET button is pressed again, the SEQUENCER

returns to measure 1.

• If you press the CYCLE: ON button to turn it OFF, cycle

playback is not possible.

• To return to the SEQUENCER PLAY display, press the

• Use this control to lower the volume of the recorded play-

back parts when it is too loud relative to the volume of

your manual performance.

• The volume of all sounds other than your manual perfor-

mance—MIDI input, etc.—is lowered.

• At the MAX position, the volume of the playback parts

correspond to their current settings; at the OFF position,

the volume is 0.

EXIT button.

• Cycle playback can also be specified on the

SEQUENCER PLAY display whenever the CYCLE: ON

indication is shown.

• The volume can be adjusted for each part. (Refer to page

27.)

• Except during SEQUENCER playback or DIRECT PLAY

of a disk, this slide control adjusts the total volume of all

the automatic accompaniment parts.

MEDLEY

Recorded songs can be played back in a med-

ley.

• During SEQUENCER recording, the volume is automati-

cally at its maximum regardless of the position of the

slide control. During playback, however, lowering the

slide control from the MAX position will lower the volume

from its recorded level. For this reason, the slide control

should normally be left in the MAX position.

1.On the SEQUENCER PLAY display, press the

MEDLEY button.

QQTG0701

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Part III

Sequencer

Naming

Here is the way to assign a name to your recorded song.

1.On the SEQ MENU display use the SONG

3.Use the buttons below the display to assign a

SELECT ∧ and ∨ buttons to select a song.

name.

• Set the character input position with the POSITION but-

tons, select the characters with the alphanumeric buttons

and repeat name assignment.

2.Press the NAMING button.

• Switch from upper to lower case letters with the ABC, abc

button.

• The display looks similar to the following.

• Use the !#$ button to switch to the symbols character set.

• Press the INS button to enter a space at the cursor posi-

tion.

• Press the DEL button to erase the character at the cursor

position.

• Press the CLR button to erase the entire name.

• Press the →← button to center the name.

4.Press the OK button.

Panel Write

You can change the panel status which is in effect at the beginning of the song. These are the settings

which are recalled when the SEQUENCER RESET button is pressed.

1.On the SEQ MENU display, use the SONG ∧

4.Press the OK button.

• “COMPLETED!” is shown on the display.

and ∨ buttons to select the song number.

• PANEL WRITE is automatically activated at the when

you start to record.

• For rhythm data, the data in the RHYTHM part has prior-

2.Use the panel buttons to change to the

desired panel settings.

ity.

3.On the SEQ MENU display, select PANEL

WRITE.

• The display looks similar to the following.

QQTG0701

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Part III

Sequencer

Song Select

You can select a desired song from the list of recorded songs.

1.On the SEQ MENU display, select RECORD

& EDIT.

3.Use the SONG SELECT L and M buttons to

select a song.

• The total amount of memory used for the current song is

shown as a percentage (%) to the right of the song name.

• If the NAMING button is pressed, the NAMING display

appears.

• To optimize memory, songs you do not wish to preserve

should be deleted. (Refer to page 72.)

2.On the RECORD & EDIT display, select

SONG SELECT.

• The display looks similar to the following.

Punch Record

If you make a playing error during REALTIME RECORD or would like to change the recording for some

other reason, you can use the punch recording feature to correct a selected portion of the performance

without having to redo the whole part.

Playing error

Recording the performance

Punch in

Punch out

Replay this portion

Recording mode

Playback

• On the display “REC” indicates tracks which are being

recorded, and “PLAY” indicates tracks which are being

played back.

1.On the SEQ MENU display, use the SONG

SELECT ∧ and ∨ buttons to select the song

number. Then select RECORD & EDIT.

4.Use the MEAS ∧ and ∨ buttons to specify the

beginning measure of playback.

• “MEASURE=” indicates the current measure number.

2.On the RECORD & EDIT display, select

PUNCH RECORD.

• The display looks similar to the following.

5.Press the START/STOP button to begin play-

back of the specified track.

6.During playback, press the PUNCH IN button

at the point you want to begin recording.

• Recording begins as soon as the PUNCH IN button is

pressed. Begin playing at this point.

• The REC indication changes to the PUNCH indication.

• The PUNCH IN button switches to the REC STOP button.

3.Select the track which contains the portion you

want to correct.

• You cannot select a track in which no data is stored.

QQTG0701

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Part III

Sequencer

7.Press the REC STOP button at the point you

want to stop recording.

• Punch recording stops immediately.

4.Use the COUNT IN MEASURE ∧ and ∨ but-

tons to specify the number of lead-in mea-

sures you wish to have played back before the

punch-in measure.

• You can also begin punch-in recording by playing the

keyboard.

• You can specify the punch-in/punch-out points with the

Pedal. (Refer to page 120.)

• Set the metronome to on or off with the ON or OFF but-

ton.

5.Press the EXIT button.

• The display changes to the PUNCH RECORD display.

Ⅲ AUTO PUNCH RECORD

You can also set the punch-in and punch-out

points beforehand, so that recording automati-

cally begins and ends at the specified points.

6.Press the START/STOP button.

• Playback begins from the measure indicated by MEA-

SURE on the display.

• Pertinent information, such as the FIRST MEASURE, is

shown in the upper section of the display.

1.On the PUNCH RECORD display, press the

AUTO: OFF button.

• The display looks similar to the following.

7.Correct the performance.

• The mode changes automatically to the recording mode

at the specified FIRST measure. Begin playing at this

point. The mode automatically changes back to the play-

back mode at the specified LAST measure.

• To discontinue punch recording in the middle, press the

CANCEL button. In this case, the recorded contents up to

that point are erased.

2.Use the FIRST MEASURE ∧ and ∨ buttons to

specify the number of the punch-in measure.

3.Use the LAST MEASURE ∧ and ∨ buttons to

specify the number of the punch-out measure.

• The number of the LAST measure must be higher than

the number of the FIRST measure.

• The specified measure is recorded.

Step Record

STEP RECORD is simply a method of making a tune by storing the sounds note-by-note on the display.

Instead of playing the keyboard directly as in the REALTIME RECORD mode, you can take your time to

input each single note. This is an especially effective method for storing complicated passages that are

difficult to play or when the exact timing of a part is critical.

Recording procedure

• The display changes to the PART SELECT display.

Record the keyboard performance and panel

changes.

1.On the SEQ MENU display, use the SONG

SELECT ∧ and ∨ buttons to select the song

number. Then select RECORD & EDIT.

2.On the RECORD & EDIT display, select STEP

RECORD.

3.Use the balance buttons below the display to

specify the track for the part you are going to

record (only one track can be selected at a

time).

(Continued on the next page)

QQTG0701

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Part III

Sequencer

• The display changes to the STEP RECORD input display

similar to the following.

• Any panel setting changes—for example changes in the

sound selection, button operation, wheel operation,

etc.—are recorded at the cursor position.

• When a dial is operated, the input value is indicated on

the display. Confirm that this is the correct value and

press the YES button to record the value or the NO but-

ton to cancel it.

REST:

To store a rest, after specifying the note

LENGTH, press the REST button.

• Positions at which nothing is stored are read as rests.

• If you selected the track to which the CHORD part has

been assigned, the display changes to the STEP

RECORD: CHORD display. (Refer to page 67.)

• If you selected the track to which the RHYTHM part has

been assigned, the display changes to the STEP

RECORD: RHYTHM display. (Refer to page 69.)

• If you selected the track to which the CONTROL part has

been assigned, the display changes to the STEP

RECORD: CONTROL display.

ERS:

If you make a mistake, move the cursor to

the error, and after displaying the data you

wish to erase, press the ERS button.

BAL:

To specify the volume at the cursor position,

after pressing the BAL button, use the

VALUE buttons to set the volume (0 to 127).

4.Use the MEAS ∧ and ∨ buttons to select the

measure.

• This step is not necessary if you are recording from mea-

sure 1 of a blank track.

9. Repeat steps 4 through 8 to continue storing

notes.

ᮤ

ᮣ

5.Use the CURSOR

and

buttons to move

• To input data on another track, press the button for the

desired track and repeat the procedure from step 2.

the cursor to the note position (dot) you are

going to store.

• Each dot represents one-eighth of a quarter-note (a

thirty-second note).

• When storing triplets, it may not be possible to match the

timing exactly with the 1/32-note steps. However, if you

select triplet-type notes for the note length (LENGTH) in

step 6 below, the timing is automatically corrected.

10.When you have finished recording, press the

PROGRAM MENUS button to turn it off.

Ⅲ Storing control data

Various control data can be stored at the cursor

position.

6.Use the left REC NOTE LENGTH ∧ and ∨

buttons to specify the note value. Select from

r³, r, x³, x, e³, e, q³, q, h, w, w × 2 to 4. (A 3

1.On the STEP RECORD: MELODY display,

press the CTL button.

denotes a triplet-type note.)

• For note values other than these, use the center REC

NOTE LENGTH buttons to specify the note value to be

added to that which you specified with the left buttons.

2.Use the CTL ∧ and ∨ buttons to select the

control data you wish to insert.

• Select from PAN, KEY SHIFT (COARSE TUNE), TUN-

ING (FINE TUNE), BEND SENS.

Example: To record a dotted quarter-note

( q. )

3.Use the VALUE ∧ and ∨ buttons to adjust the

q + e

numerical value of the setting.

7. Use the right REC NOTE LENGTH ∧ and ∨

buttons to specify the actual length of the

produced sound for the desired legato or

staccato effect.

4.Press YES button.

TENU (tenuto): Sound is produced for 95%

of the note length.

NORM (normal): 80%

STAC (staccato): 50%

CUTT (cutting): 25%

8.Specify the pitch and velocity of the note by

playing the keyboard.

• The dot on the display where the note is stored changes

to a mark.

∗

• When recording chords, you can store multiple notes at

one position.

QQTG0701

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Part III

Sequencer

Ⅲ Correcting the data

Sound data

1.In the STEP RECORD mode, specify the track

The name of the sound is displayed. Change the

sound as desired (the sound setting display is

interposed on the current display).

you wish to correct.

2.Use the MEAS buttons to go to the measure

you wish to modify. Use the CURSOR buttons

Control data

The name of the function is displayed. Change

the data as desired.

to move the cursor to the point ( ) you wish

∗

to edit.

• The data stored at that point is shown on the display.

• When multiple data is stored at one point, different data is

displayed in order each time a CURSOR button is

pressed. When a chord is recorded, a different note in the

chord is displayed each time a CURSOR button is

pressed.

• Press the ERS button to erase the data which is dis-

played.

• You can also correct data which was stored in the REAL-

TIME RECORD mode.

• Performance (NOTE) data can be recorded or edited on

a piano roll display, and there is also a specialized dis-

play for recording and editing the DRUMS part data.

(Refer to page 73 or 74.)

3.Correct the data.

There are three types of data:

Performance data

NOTE data (note pitch) and VEL data (how hard

the key was played) and LEN data (1 = 1/96 of a

quarter note [ q ]) are displayed. Use the relevant

buttons to correct the data as desired.

Store a chord progression

Store the chord progression for the AUTO PLAY CHORD in the track for the CHORD part. Then, when

the AUTO PLAY CHORD is used during playback, even if you do not specify the chords with your left

hand, the chords change automatically.

•

The chord length is specified with the CHORD STEP RECORD keys on the keyboard.

Correction keys

ᮤ

Move back one step.

Move forward one step.

ᮣ

DELETE

q .

h .

Repeat key

Press to end the chord-storing proce-

dure and to specify automatic repeat

playback of the stored progression.

End key

Note value keys

Press after the whole chord progres-

sion has been stored.

Whole note

Dotted half-note

Half-note

Dotted quarter-note

Quarter-note

Eighth-note

DELETE key

DELETE Press to erase data.

• To erase all the data from the current track, while

pressing the DELETE key, press the End key

(

Reset key

Press to begin storing from the begin-

ning.

QQTG0701

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Part III

Sequencer

Ⅲ Example of storing a chord progression

(2) While playing an F chord, press the h key one

time.

Measure 1

1.On the SEQ MENU display, use the SONG

SELECT ∧ and ∨ buttons to select the song

number. Then select RECORD & EDIT.

(1) While playing a D7 chord, press the h key one

time.

2.On the RECORD & EDIT display, select STEP

RECORD.

(2) While playing a G7 chord, press the h key one

• The display changes to the PART SELECT display.

time.

• You can press the INTRO & ENDING button or a FILL IN

button on the panel to store the desired pattern at the cur-

sor position. (An INTRO or COUNT INTRO can be stored

only at the beginning.)

3.Using the balance buttons below the display,

select the track to which the CHORD (CHD/

APC) part has been assigned.

• The display changes to the STEP RECORD: CHORD

input display similar to the following.

• Store a rest by pressing a note value key without specify-

ing a chord.

5.At the end of the chord progression, press the

End key (

• The Keyboard exits the recording mode.

• During playback, playback of the recorded chord progres-

sion stops at this point. For automatic repeat playback of

the chord progression, press the Repeat key (

instead of the End key (

)

• STEP REC: CHORD can also be enabled by pressing on

the EASY RECORD button continuously a few seconds.

This will display the CHORD screen.

• When you play back the track for the CHORD part, the

chords of the automatic accompaniment change in accor-

dance with the stored chord progression.

• To specify chords by the <one finger> mode, select the

BASIC mode before entering the STEP RECORD mode.

• If the ON BASS button is on, chords such as “C on G”

can also be specified (except in the <one finger> mode).

• The CHORD FINDER feature, which shows you how to

finger a specified chord, is available. (Refer to page 47.)

4.Store the chords.

While playing a C chord with your left hand,

press the

key two time with your right hand.

Ⅲ Correct the recorded chord progression

1.Follow the procedure to select the STEP

RECORD: CHORD display.

2. Use the MEAS buttons to go to the measure

ᮤ

ᮣ

you wish to modify. Use the

and

Correc-

tion keys to move the cursor to the point ( )

∗

you wish to edit.

• A “beep” tone indicates that the chord has been success-

fully stored.

• The dot on the display where the chord is stored changes

• The lengths of rests are indicated by the respective rest

value × its multiplier.

to a mark and the cursor automatically moves forward, in

∗

accordance with the specified note value, to the next unre-

corded position. The chord name is shown on the display.

Example:

.................1-beat rest (quarter rest)

‰

................1/2-beat rest (eighth rest)

‰

× 1 + ....1-1/2-beat rest

(1) While playing an Am chord, press the h key

(dotted quarter rest)

one time.

× 10........10-beat rest

• To go to the end of the chord progression, while pressing

ᮤ

the Reset key (

), press the

key.

3.Correct the chord data.

QQTG0701

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Part III

Sequencer

Chord data

Control data

When the chord name is displayed at the cursor

position, you can press the DELETE key to

erase the data and then store a new chord.

• If you do not erase the displayed data before entering new

chord data, the new data is inserted at this point, and the

displayed data is merely shifted by the note value of the

new chord.

The name of the stored function (INTRO, FILL,

etc.) is displayed. You can press the DELETE

key to erase the data which is displayed.

Ⅲ TRACK CLEAR

To erase all data from the current track, press

the CLR button, and then press the YES button

on the confirmation display.

• If you wish to cancel the clear procedure, press the NO

button.

• Rests can also be erased. Each time the DELETE key is

pressed, the rest is erased in units of × 1. The rest is

erased last.

‰

• If you wish to cancel the REPEAT, enter an END com-

mand.

Store a rhythm progression

Changes in the rhythm selection and tempo, as well as the intro, fill-ins and the ending, can be stored by

measures with the step recording method.

1.On the SEQ MENU display, use the SONG ∧

and ∨ buttons to select the song number.

Then select RECORD & EDIT.

6.Repeat steps 4 and 5 to continue storing the

rhythm progression.

7.At the end of the rhythm progression, press

2.On the RECORD & EDIT display, select STEP

RECORD.

• The display changes to the PART SELECT display.

the END button.

• If the REP button is pressed instead of the END button,

during playback the recorded rhythm progression is

repeated.

• The Keyboard exits the recording mode.

3.Using the balance buttons below the display,

select the track to which the RHYTHM (RHY)

part has been assigned.

Ⅲ Correct the recorded rhythm progression

1.Follow the procedure to select the STEP

RECORD: RHYTHM display.

• The display changes to the STEP RECORD: RHYTHM

input display similar to the following.

2.Use the MEAS buttons to go to the measure

you wish to modify. (The is highlighted.)

∗

3.Correct the rhythm data.

• Press the ERS button to erase data at the cursor posi-

tion.

• If you wish to cancel the REPEAT, enter an END com-

mand.

• If you select a rhythm with a different time signature, the

time signature of all subsequent measures will also

change.

• If data has already been recorded in other tracks, you

cannot select a rhythm with a different time signature.

4.Use the MEAS L and M buttons to go to the

measure you wish to record.

5.Store the rhythm data.

• Data which can be stored:

START/STOP

Ⅲ TRACK CLEAR

To erase all data from the current track, press

the CLR button, and then press the YES button

on the confirmation display.

• If you wish to cancel the clear procedure, press the NO

button.

Changes in the rhythm selection

RHYTHM VARIATION 1–4,

COUNT INTRO, INTRO, FILL IN,

ENDING

Tempo changes

• Be sure to store the START/STOP data in the measure in

which the rhythm starts or stops.

• If you are storing a COUNT INTRO or INTRO, store this

data before the START/STOP data.

• If the tempo is changed, the display changes to the con-

firmation display. After specifying the desired tempo,

Press the YES button to store the specified tempo, or

press the NO button to cancel the new tempo value.

QQTG0701

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Part III

Sequencer

Track Assign

Each SEQUENCER part is already assigned to a track number. However, you can use the TRACK

ASSIGN function to assign parts to tracks as you wish.

1.On the SEQ MENU display, use the SONG

SELECT ∧ and ∨ buttons to select the song

number. Then select RECORD & EDIT.

Ⅲ TRACK ASSIGN PRESETS

A preset track assignment can be selected.

1.On the TRACK ASSIGN display, press the

PRESET button.

• The display looks similar to the following.

2.On the RECORD & EDIT display, select

TRACK ASSIGN.

• The display looks similar to the following.

2.Use the SONG ∧ and ∨ buttons to select the

3.Use the TR L and M buttons to select the

song number for which the preset track

track.

assignment will be effective.

• If ALL is selected, the track assignment is effective for all

the songs.

4.Use the TRACK ASSIGN ∧ and ∨ buttons to

select the part for the specified track.

• When a part other than the CONTROL, APC, CHORD or

RHYTHM part is assigned, the track assign procedure is

completed at this point.

3.Select the track assign mode.

INITIAL:

Factory-preset settings.

• Either the CHORD part or APC part can be assigned to a

track, but not both.

• The CONTROL, APC, CHORD and RHYTHM parts can-

not be assigned to more than one track.

TECHNICS MULTI RECORDING:

The optimum track assignment for multiplex

recording.

• You can use the ON and OFF buttons for LOCAL CONT.

to specify whether or not the sound of the part assigned

to this track is generated. Because no sound is generated

for this instrument’s parts assigned to tracks set to OFF

through this procedure, use this setting to generate

sound from an external sound source through the MIDI

connectors.

• You can use the MIDI OUT ON and OFF buttons to spec-

ify whether or not the data of the part assigned to this

track is sent as MIDI data. When set to OFF, the data is

not sent, even if MIDI equipment is connected.

GM MULTI RECORDING:

The optimum track assignment for creating

GENERAL MIDI data.

4.Press the OK button.

• “COMPLETED!” is shown on the display and the selected

track assign mode is enabled.

• You can confirm the track assignment settings on the

TRACK ASSIGN display.

5.When assigning the CONTROL, APC,

CHORD or RHYTHM part, press the OK but-

ton.

QQTG0701

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Part III

Sequencer

Quantize

The QUANTIZE function can correct the timing of your performance after it has been recorded. If the

rhythm is slightly out of sync or inexact, it will automatically be corrected to the specified quantize level.

1.On the SEQ MENU display, select RECORD

& EDIT.

7.Use the STRENGTH ∧ and ∨ buttons to select

the amount of quantize (%).

• 100% is a convenient setting. When set to 100%, the per-

formance data is quantized exactly to the level specified

for the VALUE (“just”). For example, at 50%, the data is

quantized to a point that is half that of the just level. By

this setting, you can attain an effect that is very slightly

off-beat from the rhythm.

2.On the RECORD & EDIT display, select

QUANTIZE.

• The display looks similar to the following.

8.Use the WINDOW ∧ and ∨ buttons to specify

the range (%) affected by the quantize setting.

• With the increment set to 100 for the VALUE, at a + set-

ting, data close to the just point is corrected, and at a –

setting, data far from the just point is corrected. For

example, if set to –30% the quantize function affects data

far from the just point, and if set to +30% the quantize

function affects data close to the just point. +100% is usu-

ally a convenient setting.

• The +100% setting and the –100% setting are the same.

Rhythm as written

in the score

Example: When VALUE is set to q

Timing of actual

performance

100% 50%

just

50% 100%

+100%

+50%

+30%

–50%

–30%

–100%

Quantized

performance

3.Use the TRACK ∧ and ∨ buttons to specify

the track number.

• You cannot select the track for the CONTROL, RHYTHM

or CHORD part.

9.Press the OK button.

• If ALL is selected, all the tracks are quantized.

• The confirmation display appears. Press the YES button

to execute the function, or press the NO button to cancel

the function.

4.Use the FIRST MEAS ∧ and ∨ buttons to

specify the start point (measure number).

5.Use the LAST MEAS ∧ and ∨ buttons to spec-

ify the end point (measure number).

6.Use the VALUE ∧ and ∨ buttons to specify the

quantize level.

• Select from q, e, e3, x, x3, r, r3. (A 3 denotes a triplet-

type note.)

QQTG0701

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Part III

Sequencer

Song Clear

Erase the recorded contents of all tracks.

1.On tne SEQ MENU display, select RECORD

& EDIT.

4.Press the OK button.

• The confirmation display appears. Press the YES button

to execute the function, or press the NO button to cancel

the function.

2.On the RECORD & EDIT display, selct SONG

CLEAR.

• The display looks similar to the following.

• If the YES button is pressed, “COMPLETED!” appears on

the display, the specified songs are erased.

3.Use the SONG No./ALL ∧ and ∨ buttons to

specify the number of the song to erase.

• The data size (KB) and the total amount of SEQUENCER

memory or current song memory used is shown as a per-

centage (%) to the right of the song name.

• If ALL is selected, all the songs recorded in the

SEQUENCER will be erased.

Track Clear

Erase the contents of a specific track.

1.On the SEQ MENU display, select RECORD

& EDIT.

4.Press the OK button.

• The confirmation display appears. Press the YES button

to execute the function, or press the NO button to cancel

the function.

2.On the RECORD & EDIT display, select

TRACK CLEAR.

• The display looks similar to the following.

• If the YES button is pressed, the specified tracks are

erased.

3.Use the balance buttons to select the track or

tracks you wish to clear.

• A “CLR” mark is shown for the selected tracks.

QQTG0701

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Part III

Sequencer

Note Edit

You can edit performance (NOTE) data on a piano roll display. This differs from the normal STEP

RECORD edit procedure, and is a convenient way to check the data for each note.

•

Data other than NOTE data cannot be corrected or recorded. To correct or record other types of data, use the STEP RECORD

display. (Refer to page 65.)

1.On the SEQ MENU display, select RECORD

& EDIT.

6.Select the data to edit (it changes to a high-

lighted horizontal bar). Edit the data.

• Use the POS L and M buttons to move the timing, the

^NOTE∧ ^and∨ ^{buttons to change the note number, the}

^VEL∧ ^and∨ ^{buttons to change the velocity (how hard}

^{the keys are played), and the LEN}∧ ^and∨ ^{buttons to}

change the note length (1 = 1/96 of a quarter note [ q ]).

• Use the GRAPH L and M buttons to view a higher or

lower section of the keyboard (in one-octave steps).

• If the ERS button is pressed, the selected NOTE data is

erased.

2.On the RECORD & EDIT display, select

NOTE EDIT.

3.On the PART SELECT display, select a track.

• The CHORD, RHYTHM and CONTROL tracks cannot be

selected.

• The display looks similar to the following.

7.Repeat steps 4 to 6 to continue editing.

Ⅲ Inserting note data

You can also store note data on this display.

1.Specify the point where the new note data will

be stored.

4.Use the MEAS L and M buttons to select the

measure you wish to edit.

2.Use the LEN ∧ and ∨ buttons to specify the

note length.

ᮤ

ᮣ

5.Use the CURSOR

and

buttons to move

• Examples of note lengths ( q = 96)

the cursor ( M ) to the point you wish to edit.

• Recorded performance (NOTE) data is shown as hori-

zontal bars. Data selected for editing is highlighted.

91: tenuto (95%)

76: normal (80%)

48: staccato (50%)

24: cutting (25%)

^{• You can use the INC}∧ ^and∨ ^{buttons to change the}

increment of cursor movement. The resolution can be set

at q /96. However, if NOTE data is present between incre-

ments, the cursor will stop.

3.Play a key on the keyboard to specify the note

pitch (NOTE NUMBER) and velocity (how

hard the key is played).

• Use the POS L and M buttons to change the timing.

• Example: 10.2.48 indicates a point in measure 10, beat 2,

point 48 (one point is 1/96 of a quarter note [ q ]).

•

is shown at the point where the END command is

4.Repeat steps 1 to 3 to input more note data.

stored.

QQTG0701

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Part III

Sequencer

Ⅲ CYCLE PLAY

You can aurally check the data you are editing by

accessing the CYCLE PLAY display from the

3.Use the END MEASURE ∧ and ∨ buttons to

select the last playback measure.

NOTE EDIT display.

• If you wish other tracks to be played back, they should be

selected beforehand on the SEQUENCER PLAY display.

(Refer to page 61.)

4.Press the START/STOP button.

• Cycle playback of the specified measures begins.

• If the SOLO button is turned on, playback changes to that

of the recording track only. If it is turned off, all the tracks

specified on the SEQUENCER PLAY display are played

back.

1.On the NOTE EDIT display, press the PLAY

button.

• The display looks similar to the following.

5.To stop cycle playback, press the START/

STOP button again.

• During playback stop, if the SEQUENCER RESET (FILL

IN 1) button is pressed, the SEQUENCER returns to the

measure number specified in step 2. If the SEQUENCER

RESET button is pressed again, the SEQUENCER

returns to measure 1.

2.Use the START MEASURE ∧ and ∨ buttons

to select the beginning playback measure.

Drum Edit

The DRUMS part can be edited on a specialized display. This differs from the normal STEP RECORD edit

procedure, and is a convenient way to check the data for each note.

^{• You can use the INC}∧ ^and∨ ^{buttons to change the}

increment of cursor movement. The resolution can be set

at q /96. However, if NOTE data is present between incre-

ments, the cursor will stop.

1.On the SEQ MENU display, select RECORD

& EDIT.

2.On the RECORD & EDIT display, select

DRUM EDIT.

• Use the POS L and M buttons to change the timing.

Example: 10.2.48 indicates a point in measure

10, beat 2, point 48 (one point is 1/96 of a

quarter note [ q ]).

3.On the PART SELECT display, select the

track for the DRUMS part.

• The CHORD, RHYTHM and CONTROL tracks cannot be

selected.

•

is shown at the point where the END command is

stored.

• The display looks similar to the following.

7.Select the data to edit (it changes to a long

bar). Edit the data.

• Use the POS L and M buttons to move the timing, the

^SND∧ ^and∨ ^{buttons to change the percussion instru-}

^{ment sound, and the VEL}∧ ^and∨ ^{buttons to change the}

velocity (how hard the keys are played).

• If the ERS button is pressed, the selected NOTE data is

erased.

4.Use the SOUND ∧ and ∨ buttons to select the

8.Repeat steps 4 to 7 to continue editing.

percussion instrument you wish to edit.

• The number to the left of the instrument name is its MIDI

NOTE NUMBER in the Technics arrangement.

• If sounds other than percussion instrument sounds are

assigned, they are not displayed.

5.Use the MEAS L and M buttons to select the

measure you wish to edit.

ᮤ

ᮣ

6.Use the CURSOR

and

buttons to move

the cursor (M) to the point you wish to edit.

• Recorded performance data is shown as vertical bars.

Data selected for editing is highlighted.

QQTG0701

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Part III

Sequencer

Ⅲ Inserting DRUMS data

You can also store DRUMS data on this display.

Ⅲ CYCLE PLAY

You can aurally check the data you are editing by

accessing the CYCLE PLAY display from the

1.Specify the point where the new note data will

be stored.

DRUM EDIT display.

• The procedure is the same as for NOTE EDIT.

• If you wish other tracks to be played back, they should be

selected beforehand on the SEQUENCER PLAY display.

(Refer to page 61.)

2.Use the VEL ∧ and ∨ buttons to specify the

velocity (how hard the key is played).

3.Press the ENTER button to store the data.

• Instead of the ENTER button, you can store data (includ-

ing velocity data) by playing the keyboard. In this case,

the instrument is that specified on the display, regardless

of which key is played.

4.Repeat steps 1 to 3 to input more DRUMS

data.

Copy and paste the recorded data

You can copy and paste specific portions of the recorded data.

1.On the FROM side, use the SONG ∧ and ∨

Select the function

buttons to select the song number you wish to

copy from.

1.On the SEQ MENU display, use the SONG

SELECT ∧ and ∨ buttons to select the number

2.On the TO side, use the SONG ∧ and ∨ but-

of the song. Then select COPY & PASTE.

tons to select the song number to copy to.

• The display looks similar to the following.

3.Press the OK button.

• The confirmation display appears. Press the YES button

to execute the function, or press the NO button to cancel

the function.

TRACK COPY

Copy the recorded data from specific tracks of a

song.

2.On the COPY & PASTE display, select a func-

tion.

3.Perform the editing procedures. (See below.)

• During the editing procedure, if the indicator for the

TEMPO/PROGRAM is lit, you can use the TEMPO/PRO-

GRAM dial for the editing function.

SONG COPY

1.Specify the track you wish to copy from.

^{• On the FROM side, use the SONG}∧ ^and∨ ^{buttons and}

^TRACK∧ ^and∨ ^{buttons to specify a track.}

• If ALL is selected, all the tracks of the specified song

number will be copied.

Copy all the recording data of a song to a spe-

cific song memory.

2.Specify the track you wish to copy to (TO

side).

3.Press the OK button.

• The confirmation display appears. Press the YES button

to execute the function, or press the NO button to cancel

the function.

QQTG0701

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Part III

Sequencer

• The track assignment settings are also copied. Note that

in some cases, the CONTROL, RHYTHM and CHORD

part data in the destination tracks may be lost.

• If ALL is selected, the specified measures are copied

to all tracks at the same time.

FIRST MEAS:

Specify the first measure to copy.

LAST MEAS:

TRACK MERGE

Specify the last measure to copy.

Merge the recorded contents of two tracks

(source tracks) and store the merged contents in

2.Specify where you wish to copy the selected

a third track (destination track).

• When the TRACK MERGE function is executed, the data

is erased from the two source tracks.

measures to.

• On the TO side, specify the settings with the correspond-

ing buttons.

TRACK:

Specify the track number you wish to copy

to.

• Measures in a track for the CONTROL, RHYTHM or

CHORD part can be copied only to the same track.

START MEAS:

Specify the start point to copy the selected

measures to.

1.Select the two source tracks (FROM).

^{• On the FROM side, use the TRACK}∧ ^and∨ ^{buttons to}

select the two source tracks.

• You cannot select the track to which the CONTROL,

RHYTHM or CHORD part has been assigned.

REPEAT:

Specify the number of times the selected

measures are to be repeated.

• If the part assigned to the left source track (“left” meaning

its position on the TRACK MERGE display) is different

from the part assigned to the right source track, when the

parts are merged in the destination track, the new track is

assigned the same part as the left track.

3.Press the OK button.

• The confirmation display appears. Press the YES button

to execute the function, or press the NO button to cancel

the function.

• Note that if the END command is included in the source

data, it is also copied. Any data following the END com-

mand is not copied.

2.Select the destination track (TO).

^{• Use the TRACK}∧ ^and∨ ^{buttons to the right of the dis-}

play to specify the track number.

MEASURE ERASE

3.Press the OK button.

• The confirmation display appears. Press the YES button

to execute the function, or press the NO button to cancel

the function.

Erase the recorded contents of specific mea-

sures. You can also specify which type of data is

to be erased.

• Note that only the contents of the measures are erased,

not the measures themselves; the length of the perfor-

mance remains the same.

MEASURE COPY

Copy recorded data of specified measures to a

specified point.

• On the destination track, the new data replaces the cur-

rent measure contents.

1.Use the TRACK ∧ and ∨ buttons to specify

the track number.

• This function does not work for the RHYTHM part or

CHORD part in which a repeat command has been

stored.

• If ALL is selected, data is erased from the specified mea-

sures of all the tracks at one time.

1.Specify the measures you wish to copy from

the source track (FROM).

• On the FROM side, specify the settings with the corre-

sponding buttons.

2.Use the FIRST MEAS ∧ and ∨ buttons to

specify the start point (measure number).

TRACK:

Specify the track number you wish to copy

the measures from.

• You cannot select the track for the RHYTHM part or

CHORD part in which a repeat command has been

stored.

3.Use the LAST MEAS ∧ and ∨ buttons to spec-

ify the end point (measure number).

QQTG0701

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Part III

Sequencer

4.Use the ERASE DATA ∧ and ∨ buttons to

MEASURE INSERT

specify the type of data to be erased.

Insert specified measures at a specified point.

• The length of the performance accordingly increases by

the number of inserted measures.

ALL:

All data is erased.

NOTE:

Only note data is erased.

CONTROL:

Only control data (volume, effect and other

panel settings as well as selection changes)

is erased.

5.Press the OK button.

1.Specify the measures you wish to copy from

• The confirmation display appears. Press the YES button

to execute the function, or press the NO button to cancel

the function.

the source track.

• On the FROM side, specify the settings with the corre-

sponding buttons.

TRACK:

Specify the track number you wish to copy

the measures from.

• This function does not work for the CHORD or

RHYTHM track in which the repeat function has been

stored.

MEASURE DELETE

Delete specified measures from a track.

• The length of the performance accordingly decreases by

the number of deleted measures.

• If ALL is selected, the measures are inserted in all

tracks at the same time.

FIRST MEASURE:

Specify the first measure to copy.

LAST MEASURE:

Specify the last measure to copy.

1.Use the TRACK ∧ and ∨ buttons to select the

2.Specify where you wish to insert the selected

track from which measures are to be deleted.

• This function does not work for the CHORD or RHYTHM

track in which the repeat function has been stored.

• If ALL is selected, the specified measures are deleted

from all the tracks at one time.

measures.

• On the TO side, specify the settings with the correspond-

ing buttons.

TRACK:

Specify the track number.

• Measures from the CHORD, RHYTHM or CONTROL

track can only be inserted in the same track.

2.Use the FIRST MEAS ∧ and ∨ buttons, to

specify the first measure to delete.

START MEASURE:

3. Use the LAST MEAS ∧ and ∨ buttons to

Specify the start point to insert the selected

measures.

specify the last measure to delete.

REPEAT:

4.Press the OK button.

Specify the number of times the selected

measures are to be repeated.

• The confirmation display appears. Press the YES button

to execute the function, or press the NO button to cancel

the function.

3.Press the OK button.

• The confirmation display appears. Press the YES button

to execute the function, or press the NO button to cancel

the function.

• Note that if the END command is included in the source

data, it is also inserted. Any data following the END com-

mand is not inserted.

QQTG0701

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Part III

Sequencer

2.Use the APC ∧ and ∨ buttons to select the

parts you wish to convert.

APC TO SMF CONVERT

This function converts data to Standard MIDI File

(SMF) format, allowing you to play back song

data created using this instrument’s automatic

accompaniment on an external sequencer or

sound generator.

• Parts that are set to OFF will not be converted.

3.Press the CONVERT button.

• Note that after the conversion, the APC/CHORD part

data is cleared; if necessary, save this data beforehand.

• A confirmation display appears. Press EXECUTE to con-

tinue with the conversion, or press the CANCEL button is

you wish to discontinue.

• After the EXECUTE button is pressed, the conversion

begins. Conversion takes the same length of time as

playback.

• If you wish to discontinue the conversion process mid-

way, press the ABORT button.

1.Use the TR L and M buttons to select the

track you wish to convert.

• In the PART column, the part name currently assigned is

shown.

• In the DATA column, a check mark (√) indicates a track in

which data is stored.

• Tracks in which RHYTHM, CONTROL, APC and CHORD

parts are stored cannot be selected (− − − is shown).

Changing the note position etc. of the

recorded data

You can change the note pitch and position etc. of recorded data.

Select the function

NOTE CHANGE

1.On the SEQ MENU display, use the SONG ∧

and ∨ buttons to select the number of the

song. Then select RANGE EDIT.

Change of pitch of specified notes.

• The display looks similar to the following.

1.Use the TRACK ∧ and ∨ buttons to select the

track you wish to edit.

• You cannot select the track for the CONTROL, RHYTHM

or CHORD part.

• If ALL is selected, all tracks will be edited.

2.On the RANGE EDIT display, select a func-

tion.

2.Use the FIRST MEAS ∧ and ∨ buttons to

specify the start point (measure number) of

the note change.

3.Perform the editing procedures. (See below.)

• During the editing procedure, if the indicator for the

TEMPO/PROGRAM is lit, you can use the TEMPO/PRO-

GRAM for the editing function.

3.Use the LAST MEAS ∧ and ∨ buttons to spec-

ify the end point (measure number) of the note

change.

4.Use the TARGET NOTE ∧ and ∨ buttons to

specify the pitch of the note you wish to

change.

• The number next to the note name is its note number.

QQTG0701

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Part III

Sequencer

5.Use the CHANGE TO ∧ and ∨ buttons to

2.Use the FIRST MEAS ∧ and ∨ buttons to

specify the start point (measure number) of

the transpose.

specify the pitch you wish to change to.

6.Press the OK button.

• The confirmation display appears. Press the YES button

to execute the function, or press the NO button to cancel

the function.

3.Use the LAST MEAS ∧ and ∨ buttons to spec-

ify the end point (measure number) of the

transpose.

4.Use the TRANSPOSE ∧ and ∨ buttons to

VELOCITY CHANGE

specify the change in pitch.

• Increments are in semitones. A value of 12 is one octave.

A – value lowers the pitch, and a + value raises it.

Modify the recorded velocity in specific mea-

sures of specific tracks.

5.Press the OK button.

• The confirmation display appears. Press the YES button

to execute the function, or press the NO button to cancel

the function.

ADVANCE/DELAY

Speed up or delay the sound production of spec-

ified performance data.

1.Use the TRACK ∧ and ∨ buttons to select the

track you wish to edit.

• You cannot select the track for the CONTROL, RHYTHM

or CHORD part.

• If ALL is selected, all tracks will be edited.

2.Use the FIRST MEAS ∧ and ∨ buttons to

specify the start point (measure number) of

the velocity change.

3.Use the LAST MEAS ∧ and ∨ buttons to spec-

ify the end point (measure number) of the

velocity change.

1.Use the TRACK ∧ and ∨ buttons to select the

track you wish to edit.

• You cannot select the track for the CONTROL, RHYTHM

or CHORD part.

• If ALL is selected, all tracks will be edited.

4.Use the VELOCITY ∧ and ∨ buttons to specify

the change in velocity.

2.Use the FIRST MEAS ∧ and ∨ buttons to

specify the start point (measure number) of

the change.

• The value you select will be added to or decrease from

the current velocity.

5.Press the OK button.

• The confirmation display appears. Press the YES button

to execute the function, or press the NO button to cancel

the function.

3.Use the LAST MEAS ∧ and ∨ buttons to spec-

ify the end point (measure number) of the

change.

4.Use the ADVANCE/DELAY ∧ and ∨ buttons

TRANSPOSE

to accelerate or delay the timing of the sound

production (–96 to +96).

• A + value causes the notes to sound later, and a – value

causes the notes to sound earlier.

Change of key of specific measures of specific

tracks.

5.Press the OK button.

• The confirmation display appears. Press the YES button

to execute the function, or press the NO button to cancel

the function.

1.Use the TRACK ∧ and ∨ buttons to select the

track you wish to edit.

• You cannot select the track for the CONTROL, RHYTHM

or CHORD part.

• If ALL is selected, all tracks will be edited.

QQTG0701

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Part IV Composer

Outline of the Composer

AUTO PLA

CHORD

ONE TOUCH

APC/SEQUENCER

VOLUME

FADE

RHYTHM GROUP

TEMPO

PROGRAM

SOUND GROUP

SEQUENCER

SPLIT

POINT

SOUND

FUNK

BALLROOM

SHOW

GUITAR

SAX

ORGAN

SOUND

EASY

PROGRAM

MENUS

DISK

MAIN

MODE

OFF/ON

PLAY

OUT ARRANGER

ROCK

SOUL

DISCO POP BALLAD BALLAD

STRINGS VOCAL HARPSI BRASS WOODWIND ACCORDION SYNTH EXPLORER

PLAY

REC

VORITES

DISK

LOAD

VOLUME

MAX

SET

CHORD FINDER

CHORD STEP REC

WALTZ

TRAD SWING WORLD MEMORY

JAZZ

LATIN

MALLET

PIANO

ORCH

DIGITAL

CONDUCTOR

RIGHT

DIGITAL

EFFECT

MULTI

EFFECT CHORUS REVERB

PROGRESSIVE

PIANIST

BEAT

16 BEAT

USA

BASS ORCH PERC WORLD MIXTURES MIXTURES DRAWBARS DRUM KITS MEMORY

LEFT

RIGHT

PIANO STYLIST

CONTRAST

OFF

MIN

P.MEM 5-8

LOAD

BEAT

MUSIC STYLE ARRANGER

VARIATION

FILL IN

INTRO

ENDING

SYNCHRO

BREAK

START

STOP

TAP TEMPO

TRANSPOSE

PARTS/TR

DISPLAY

HOLD EXIT

GRAND UPRIGHT ELECTRIC MODERN

SIMPLE PIANO

TECHNI-CHORD

BANK

SET

DEMO

MUTE

PAGE

SEQUENCER COUNT

RESET INTRO

PIANO

PANEL MEMORY

The COMPOSER enables you to create your own accompaniment patterns. A pattern is comprised of 8

parts: DRUMS 1, 2, BASS and ACCOMP1–5 parts. These parts would form the backing of a song.

Rhythm components which can be stored

Different INTRO 1, 2, VARIATION 1 to 4, FILL IN

1, 2 patterns can be created for each MEMORY

(A, B, C).

• Each VARIATION is made of a PATTERN, FILL 1 and

FILL 2.

• A Maj (major) and Min (minor) pattern is available for

each of the INTRO and ENDING 1 and 2.

INTRO

VARI 1

VARI 2

VARI 3

VARI 4

ENDING

1 Maj

1 Min

2 Maj

2 Min

PATTERN PATTERN PATTERN PATTERN 1 Maj

FILL IN 1

FILL IN 2

FILL IN 1

FILL IN 2

FILL IN 1

FILL IN 2

FILL IN 1

FILL IN 2

1 Min

2 Maj

2 Min

Memory capacity

COMPOSER menu

Expressed in terms of notes, the total number of

notes which can be stored in all the COMPOSER

memories is about 13,000. The remaining mem-

ory available for recording is shown on the

1.Press the PROGRAM MENUS button to turn it

on.

• The display looks similar to the following.

recording display as a percentage (%).

• When “Memory full!” appears on the display no more data

can be stored in the COMPOSER.

Ⅲ MEMORY

Because the contents of the MEMORY are

erased after the power is turned off, you should

save the data on disks if you wish to keep it.

(Refer to page 97.)

2.Select COMPOSER.

• The display looks similar to the following.

QQTG0701

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Part IV

Composer

Summary of the COMPOSER menu items

RECORDING MEMORY-A

PATTERN COPY (page 88)

Create a memory in the MEMORY A bank.

Copy a rhythm pattern into a memory.

RECORDING MEMORY-B

SEQ TO COMPOSER COPY (page 89)

Copy recorded data in the SEQUENCER to

the COMPOSER.

Create a memory in the MEMORY B bank.

RECORDING MEMORY-C

Create a memory in the MEMORY C bank.

LOAD SINGLE COMPOSER

Recall the desired COMPOSER data from

data saved on a disk. This procedure is the

same as when COMPOSER is selected for

SINGLE LOAD. (Refer to page 93.)

EASY COMPOSER

Create a rhythm pattern with a simplified

procedure.

Three ways to record in the COMPOSER

There are three ways to create and record a

rhythm.

Ⅲ Simple recording method

Ⅲ Pattern Copy (page 88)

Use EASY COMPOSER to quickly create a

unique rhythm just by selecting a pattern for

each part.

Copy a preset rhythm or SEQUENCER data to a

COMPOSER memory, edit it as you like, and

then store it as a new rhythm.

Ⅲ Create a completely new rhythm (page 82)

Compose all the parts of a completely new

rhythm from scratch.

• You can use either realtime recording or step record for

any part of the recording.

Simple recording method

With EASY COMPOSER you can easily create a unique rhythm pattern by selecting a different style for

each part of the rhythm.

1.On the COMPOSER MENU display, select

EASY COMPOSER.

• The display looks similar to the following.

4.Use the STYLE ∧ and ∨ buttons to select a

style.

5.Use the VARI ∧ and ∨ buttons to select the

variation number.

• The number of variations differs depending on the

selected style.

• A part which is set to OFF does not sound. Note that the

“BsDrum&Snare” part cannot be set to OFF.

6.Repeat steps 3 to 5 to select styles for the

other parts.

2.Use the MEM ∧ and ∨ buttons to select the

memory in which to record your rhythm.

• Select from A-vari 1 to 4, B-vari 1 to 4 and C-vari 1 to 4.

7.Press the SET button.

• The rhythm pattern is played back.

• If you are not satisfied with the rhythm pattern, repeat

steps 3 to 7.

• If you wish to correct the sounds or phrases in your

rhythm pattern, press the EDIT button. The display

changes to the recording display. (Refer to page 83.)

3.Use the PART L and M buttons to select the

part.

• In the EASY COMPOSER, the new rhythm pattern is

divided into 9 parts, to each of which a style and variation

is assigned.

• For playback, refer to page 85.

QQTG0701

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Part IV

Composer

Create a completely new rhythm

Clear the memories and compose a completely new rhythm from scratch.

•

You can also use this method when copying a pattern from a preset rhythm or the SEQUENCER.

Prepare to record

1.On the COMPOSER MENU display, select a

memory in which to record (RECORDING

MEMORY A, B, or C).

5. Press the YES button.

• All the data for the selected pattern is erased.

• The display looks similar to the following.

6. Press the MEASURE SETTING button.

2.Use the buttons below the display to select the

7. Use the MEASURE ∧ and ∨ buttons to spec-

ify the number of measures in your new

rhythm pattern (1 to 16).

pattern you want to create.

• If the MEM CLR button is pressed, all the current con-

tents of the MEMORY (A/B/C) are erased (a confirmation

display appears).

• You can press the NAMING button and assign a name to

the MEMORY.

8. Use the TIME SIGNATURE ∧ and ∨ buttons

to specify the meter of the pattern (1/4 to

8/4).

• When the settings for the MEASURE and TIME SIGNA-

TURE of the INTRO or ENDING patterns are changed,

the Maj and Min settings change at the same time.

9. Press the OK button.

10.Press the EXIT button.

• To assign a name to each VARIATION, press the VARI

button and select a number.

3.On the RECORD MEMORY display, press the

OK button.

• The display looks similar to the following.

4.Press the CLEAR THE ENTIRE PATTERN

button.

• The display looks similar to the following.

QQTG0701

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Part IV

Composer

• For the ACCOMP and BASS parts, select sounds from

groups other than the DIGITAL DRAWBAR sound

groups.

• The sounds marked with # represent special guitar per-

formances and changing them to other sounds may

result in an unnatural, awkward sound expression.

KEY SETTING

Set the key and chord in which you wish the

recorded pattern to be played. If the recorded

performance is played in a key or chord different

from this setting, the automatic accompaniment

will not be able to distinguish the correct chord.

4.Record the part.

1.On the RECORDING display press the KEY

SETTING button.

• The display looks similar to the following.

• The specified number of measures are repeatedly played

back, during which time any newly played notes are

added to those already recorded. The current measure

number is shown on the display as “MEASURE=”.

• Record the performance in C major for correct chord pro-

gressions during playback. Follow the KEY SETTING

procedure if you wish to record the performance in a dif-

ferent scale.

2.Use the KEY ∧ and ∨ buttons to set the key.

Use the CHORD ∧ and ∨ buttons to set the

chord type (Maj/Min).

• The sustain pedal operation or PITCH BEND and MODU-

LATION effects when MIDI data is received are also

recorded (except for the DRUMS part).

3.When you have finished making the settings,

press the EXIT button.

Ⅲ Button functions

PART BALANCE:

Adjust the volume of each part on the PART

BALANCE display. (These settings are not

recorded.)

Recording procedure

PART SETTING:

You can make detailed settings for each part.

(Refer to page 84.)

STEP RECORD:

Change to the STEP RECORD mode. (Refer

to page 86.)

1.In the START RECORDING area on the dis-

play, select the rhythm part you want to record

SOLO:

first.

Mute all parts except the part which is cur-

BAS: BASS

AC1–5: ACCOMP 1–5

DR1, 2: DRUMS 1, 2

rently being recorded.

• A MUTE mark is shown for the other parts on the display.

• To turn off the SOLO function, press this button again.

• The metronome sound starts and the display looks simi-

lar to the following.

PART CLR:

Erase all recorded contents of the currently

selected part.

NOTE CLR:

Data is erased one note or one percussion

instrument (DRUMS part) sound at a time.

• Hold and press this button, and press the keyboard key

that corresponds to the note or percussion instrument

(DRUMS part) sound you wish to erase.

2.Adjust the tempo.

• The tempo is shown on the display as q =.

• The tempo can be freely adjusted when you play back

the rhythm pattern, so record at the tempo which is easi-

est for you to play.

ALL ERAS:

The performance recorded in the selected part

is erased for as long as this button is pressed.

3.Select the sound.

(Continued on the next page)

• For the DRUMS part, only sounds from the DRUM KITS

sound group can be selected.

QQTG0701

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Part IV

Composer

QUANTIZE:

Smooth out any unevenness in the timing of

your performance.

• Before recording, select the note value for the desired

quantize level. (The quantize level is shown on the dis-

play as QUANTIZE=.)

6.When you have finished recording the rhythm,

turn off the PROGRAM MENUS button.

KEY IN CHORD MODIFY <PAGE 2/2> (except

for INTRO, ENDING, DRUMS):

Use the GROUP and TYPE ∧ and ∨ buttons

to select the type of pattern progression.

• This setting is for the sound that is going to be recorded

from this time.

5.Use the buttons below the display to switch to

a different recording part, and proceed to

record each part in turn.

Chord Modify Change

For data that has already been recorded, you can select the type of pattern progression for the bass and

accomp parts.

•

This function cannot be used for the INTRO and ENDING patterns.

• If a progression type for which the note name is displayed

(in C key) was selected for the chord group, played notes

which are not displayed are changed to notes which are

displayed.

1.On the RECORDING display, press the

CHORD MODIFY CHANGE button.

• The display looks similar to the following.

4.Use the FUNCTION ∧ and ∨ buttons to

enable or disable the function.

KEEP: No change.

CHANGE: The change is enabled.

5.When you have finished making the settings

for each part, press the OK button.

2.Use the PART L and M buttons to select the

part you wish to set.

6.Press the EXIT button.

3.Use the GROUP and MODIFY TYPE ∧ and ∨

buttons to select the corresponding progres-

sion type.

Part Setting

You can make detailed settings for each part.

1.On the REALTIME RECORDING display,

press the PART SETTING button.

• The settings comprise 3 pages of the display. Use the

PAGE buttons to switch pages.

2.Use the PART L and M buttons to select a

part.

3.Use the ∧ and ∨ buttons to set the corre-

sponding item.

QQTG0701

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Part IV

Composer

PITCH POINT:

REV:

Depth of the REVERB (0 to 127).

The pitch at which the pattern progression

sound is lowered by one octave.

• When the root note of the specified chord is higher than

the set pitch point, the pitch of that part is automatically

lowered by one octave, thus avoiding an unnaturally high

accompaniment pitch.

CHO:

Depth of the CHORUS (0 to 127).

BEND RANGE:

• This is effective only for the part for which the Melody

group was selected in CHORD MODIFY CHANGE.

Adjust the range of pitch change when the

PITCH BEND data is received (0 to 12).

SOUND:

Use the panel buttons to select the sound.

DIGI EFF:

Set the DIGITAL EFFECT to on or off.

• (SOUND) is the initialized setting of the sound.

EQ-Hi:

Sound correction in the high range.

^{• Use the FC}∧ ^and∨ ^{buttons to adjust the standard fre-}

^{quency. Use the GAIN}∧ ^and∨ ^{buttons to set the ratio of}

change.

BALANCE:

EQ-Low:

Adjust the volume balance.

Sound correction in the low range.

^{• Use the FC}∧ ^and∨ ^{buttons to adjust the standard fre-}

^{quency. Use the GAIN}∧ ^and∨ ^{buttons to set the ratio of}

change.

PAN:

Adjust the stereo balance of each part (LEFT

64 – CENTER – RIGHT 63).

• At “LEFT 64”, the sound is all the way to the left, at

“RIGHT 63” all the way to the right. The center point is

CENTER.

Playback

• The display looks similar to the following.

1.In the RHYTHM GROUP section, press the

MEMORY button.

RHYTHM GROUP

FUNK &

BALLROOM

METRONOME POP

ROCK

SOUL

DISCO POP BALLAD BALLAD & SHOW

WALTZ

JAZZ & LATIN &

8 BEAT 16 BEAT

USA

& TRAD SWING WORLD MEMORY

2.Select the desired memory (A/B/C).

LOAD

3.Use the VARIATION buttons to select a varia-

tion.

4.Press the START/STOP button.

• The DRUMS part begins to play back.

• The BASS and ACCOMP parts are played back when

you use the AUTO PLAY CHORD.

QQTG0701

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Part IV

Composer

Step Record

Use STEP RECORD to store the notes one-by-one on the display. This is a convenient way to store com-

plicated patterns that are difficult to play.

Recording procedure

1.While you are recording, press the STEP

6.Specify the pitch and velocity of the note by

RECORD button.

• The display changes to the STEP RECORD display simi-

lar to the following.

playing the keyboard.

• The dot on the display where the note is stored changes

^{to a}∗ ^mark.

• When recording chords, you can store multiple notes at

one position.

REST:To store a rest, after specifying the note

LENGTH, press the REST button.

• Positions at which nothing is stored are read as rests.

ERS:If you make a mistake, move the cursor to

the error, and after displaying the data

you wish to erase, press the ERS button.

2.Use the CURSOR buttons to move the cursor

to the note position you are going to store.

• Each dot represents one-eighth of a quarter-note (a

thirty-second note).

7.Repeat steps 2 through 6 to continue storing

notes.

• When storing triplets, it may not be possible to match the

timing exactly with the 1/32-note steps. However, if you

select triplet-type notes for the note length (LENGTH) in

step 4 below, the timing is automatically corrected.

^{• To record a different part, use the PART}∧ ^and∨ ^buttons

to select another part.

• The NOTE, VELOCITY, LENGTH, CHORD MODIFY and

CONTROL can be revised later. Press the OK button

after the revision.

3.Use the PAGE button to access the PAGE 2/2

display.

• You can easily switch between the REALTIME mode and

the STEP mode any time during recording. To return to

the realtime recording display during the STEP RECORD

mode, press the EXIT button.

4.Use the left LENGTH buttons to specify the

note value. Select from r³, r, x³, x, e³, e, q³, q,

h, w, w × 2 to 4. (A 3 denotes a triplet-type

note.)

• For note values other than these, use the right LENGTH

buttons to specify the note value to be added to that

which you specified with the left buttons.

Example: To record a dotted quarter-note (q.)

q + e

5.Use the PHRS ∧ and ∨ buttons to specify the

actual length of the produced sound for the

desired legato or staccato effect.

TENU (tenuto): Sound is produced for 95%

of the note length.

NORM (normal): 80%

STAC (staccato): 50%

CUTT (cutting): 25%

QQTG0701

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Part IV

Composer

Measure Edit

You can edit the recorded data one measure at a time.

START MEASURE:

Select the function you wish to edit.

Specify the start point to copy the selected

measures to.

1.During recording, press the MEASURE EDIT

button.

• The display looks similar to the following.

3.Press the OK button.

• The confirmation display appears. Press the YES button

to execute the function, or press the NO button to cancel

the function.

• If the FROM and TO parts are the same and the FROM

and TO measures overlap, copy is not possible.

MEASURE ERASE

2.Select the function.

Erase the recorded contents of specific mea-

sures.

• Note that only the contents of the measures are erased,

not the measures themselves; the length of the perfor-

mance remains the same.

3.Follow the procedure to edit the function (see

below).

• Only the contents of the same pattern can be edited.

MEASURE COPY

Copy recorded data of specified measures to a

specified point.

• On the destination track, the new data replaces the cur-

rent measure contents.

1.Use the PART ∧ and ∨ buttons to specify the

part.

• If ALL is selected, data is erased from the specified mea-

sures of all the parts at one time.

2.Use the FIRST MEASURE ∧ and ∨ buttons to

specify the start point (measure number).

3.Use the LAST MEASURE ∧ and ∨ buttons to

1.Specify the measures you wish to copy from

specify the end point (measure number).

the source track (FROM).

• On the FROM side, specify the settings with the corre-

sponding buttons.

4.Press the OK button.

• The confirmation display appears. Press the YES button

to execute the function, or press the NO button to cancel

the function.

PART:

Select the part to copy from. (If ALL is

selected, all parts are copied.)

FIRST MEASURE:

Specify the first measure to copy.

LAST MEASURE:

Specify the last measure to copy.

2.Specify where you wish to copy the selected

measures to.

• On the TO side, specify the settings with the correspond-

ing buttons.

PART:

Select the part to copy to.

QQTG0701

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Part IV

Composer

MEASURE DELETE

MEASURE INSERT

Delete specified measures from all parts at once.

• The length of the performance accordingly decreases by

the number of deleted measures.

Insert blank measures at a specified point.

• The length of the performance accordingly increases by

the number of inserted measures.

1.Use the FIRST MEASURE ∧ and ∨ buttons, to

1.Use the FIRST MEASURE button to select the

point (measure) where the measures are to be

inserted.

specify the first measure to delete.

2.Use the LAST MEASURE ∧ and ∨ buttons to

specify the last measure to delete.

• One measure is the smallest unit that can be deleted.

2.Use the NUMBER OF MEASURE button to

select the number of blank measures to insert.

• No more than 16 measures total can be inserted.

3.Press the OK button.

• The confirmation display appears. Press the YES button

to execute the function, or press the NO button to cancel

the function.

3.Press the OK button.

• The confirmation display appears. Press the YES button

to execute the function, or press the NO button to cancel

the function.

• When the INTRO or ENDING measures are deleted, the

Maj and Min data are erased at the same time.

• The Maj or Min data is inserted in the INTRO and END-

ING at the same time.

Pattern Copy

Use this function to copy a pattern from a rhythm or from SEQUENCER data.

PATTERN COPY

Copy a rhythm to the COMPOSER.

3.Select the memory you wish to copy to.

• You can also copy a pattern from the MEMORY.

• In the TO box, specify the settings with the corresponding

buttons.

1.On the COMPOSER MENU display, select

PATTERN COPY.

• The display looks similar to the following.

MEMORY: Memory name (A, B or C)

PATTERN: Pattern name

•If ALL is selected, all the patterns are copied.

4.Press the OK button.

• When copying has been successfully completed, “COM-

PLETED!” appears on the display.

• If you wish to use the COMPOSER functions to edit the

copied data, press the EDIT button, and follow the proce-

dure to record a pattern.

2.Select the pattern you wish to copy.

• In the FROM box, specify the settings with the corre-

sponding buttons.

GROUP: Group name

RHYTHM: Rhythm name

PATTERN: Pattern name

•If ALL is selected, all the patterns are copied.

QQTG0701

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Part IV

Composer

Ⅲ Copying individual parts

1.Use the PAGE ∧ and ∨ buttons to select

PAGE 2/2.

6.Use the TRANSPOSE ∧ and ∨ buttons to

change the key of the copied measures (−24

to +24).

• The display looks similar to the following.

• Units are in semitones.

7.Use the MEMORY ∧ and ∨ buttons to specify

the COMPOSER memory to copy to.

8.Use the PATTERN ∧ and ∨ buttons to specify

the pattern to copy to.

9.For each COMPOSER part, specify the

SEQUENCER track from which to copy data.

• Use the PART L and M buttons to specify the part name,

^{and the TRACK}∧ ^and∨ ^{buttons to specify the track}

number.

2.On the FROM side, use the buttons to specify

the part to copy from.

• For the DRUM part you can specify the DRUMS 1 or 2

part; for other parts you can specify a part other than a

DRUMS part.

• Parts which are set to OFF are blank.

10.Press the OK button.

3.Specify the destination on the TO side to

which the part will be copied.

• “COMPLETED!” is shown on the display.

• If you wish to use the COMPOSER function to edit the

copied data, press the EDIT button, and follow the proce-

dure to record a pattern.

4. Press the OK button.

• In the case of INTRO or ENDING, if a measure contains

a Maj or Min command, it is reproduced in the other pat-

tern as well.

SEQ TO COMPOSER COPY

Data from the SEQUENCER can be copied to a

COMPOSER memory. For example, you can

use a rhythm pattern on a song disk as the auto-

matic accompaniment for your own performance.

1.Play back the song you wish to copy from

SEQUENCER to confirm the tracks, the mea-

sures and the time signature you wish to copy.

2.Follow the procedure in “Prepare to record” to

prepare the COMPOSER memory you will be

copying to. (Refer to page 82.)

• Be sure that time signature setting in the SEQUENCER

data you are copying from and the time signature in the

COMPOSER memory you are copying to are the same,

or the data will not be copied successfully.

3.On the COMPOSER MENU display, select

SEQ TO COMPOSER COPY.

• The display looks similar to the following.

4.Use the FIRST MEAS ∧ and ∨ buttons to

specify the number of the first measure to

copy.

5.Use the LAST MEAS ∧ and ∨ buttons to spec-

ify the number of the last measure to copy.

QQTG0701

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Part V Disk Drive

Outline of the Disk Drive function

The Disk Drive enables you to store recorded and stored data from this instrument’s memories on disks,

as well as play commercial recorded disks on this instrument.

Internal memory and Disk Drive

The storable internal memory of this instrument

as well as the backup time are limited. However,

Floppy Disk Drive

the Disk Drive maximizes your control of data

management by allowing you to store (SAVE)

this instrument’s data on disks, and then to recall

(LOAD) it at any time.

• The BACK UP data will not be erased even with the pas-

sage of time.

SAVE

LOAD

Ⅲ The following data can be saved/loaded:

PERFORMANCE

CURRENT PANEL (The current panel settings)

PANEL MEMORY

SEQUENCER

Floppy disk

COMPOSER (MEMORY contents)

SOUND MEMORY

EFFECT MEMORY

BACKUP

• Instead of using MIDI & FAVORITES as frequently

loaded and saved data, it is recommended that you save

it with other data as backup data.

MIDI & FAVORITES

• When creating or saving song data, it is recommended

that you use the performance data in the PERFOR-

MANCE group.

• The SEQUENCER contents can be saved in one-song

increments (SEQUENCER SONG SAVE).

• Please use 2HD disks to load/save BACKUP data.

Main parts of the Disk Drive

Eject button

Press to remove the disk from the Disk Drive.

Disk slot

• You can use 3.5 inch 2DD (720 KB) or 2HD (1.44 MB)

disks; however, 2HD disks formatted as 2DD cannot be

used.

Eject button

This indicator is lit continuously

as long as the power is on.

QQTG0701

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Part V

Disk Drive

Using commercial song disks

Playback of commercial song disks

Not only disks recorded on this instrument, but

also data from commercial song disks can be

read on this instrument.

DIRECT PLAY lets you enjoy playing commer-

cially sold song disks directly from a disk. It’s fast

because you don’t have to load the disk data into

your instrument’s memory.

• This instrument accepts the following file formats:

TECHNICS File format

• DIRECT PLAY is possible from the following disks:

Standard MIDI File

Standard MIDI File format

Standard MIDI File with Lyrics

Ⅲ Loading Technics File format disks

DISK ORCHESTRA

COLLECTION™ (DOC)

Using Technics file format disks allows you load

SOUND EDIT, rhythm & accompaniments,

PANEL MEMORY and Song data into your

instrument to expand its potential even further.

PianoDisc™

*All product and company names are trademarks or

registered trademarks of their respective owners.

*DISK ORCHESTRA COLLECTION is a trademark of

the YAMAHA Corporation.

Ⅲ About Standard MIDI Files

“Standard MIDI File” (SMF) is a standardized

data format which makes it possible for music

data to be exchanged among different sequenc-

ers. Data stored in this format on sequencers of

different models can be played back on this

instrument, and vice versa. Note, however, that

Standard MIDI Files ensure the compatibility of

data such as NOTE data (keyboard performance

data), VELOCITY (how hard the keyboard is

played), PROGRAM NUMBER data (voice num-

ber data), etc. Because it does not guarantee

100% faithful reproduction of recorded music

which is replete with such data, it may be neces-

sary for you to adjust the settings to your satis-

Ⅲ SMF with LYRICS

SMF with LYRICS is a format in which character

information that is included with the MIDI data,

such as karaoke lyrics, can be displayed. This

instrument supports this format, making it possi-

ble to view the lyrics on the display while a per-

formance is played back.

faction.

Ⅲ GENERAL MIDI LEVEL 2 (GM2)

• Only files with the “.MID” extension can be loaded.

• Standard MIDI File FORMAT 1 can be loaded, but not

saved.

This instrument complies with GENERAL MIDI

(GM) LEVEL 2 standards. GM LEVEL 2 is a uni-

form world standard for MIDI sound generators

that improves on existing GM standards, in order

to realize an enhanced performance expression.

Sound generators of this class can reproduce vir-

tually the identical conditions that were in effect

at the time of recording.

• This instrument’s SEQUENCER data can be saved to a

disk in Standard MIDI File (FORMAT 0) and can be used

by other equipment.

Equipment which conforms to GENERAL MIDI

LEVEL 2 standards is indicated by the following

logo.

• This instrument also conforms to GENERAL MIDI play-

back.

QQTG0701

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Part V

Disk Drive

Outline of the procedure

AUTO PLA

CHORD

ONE TOUCH

APC/SEQUENCER

VOLUME

FADE

RHYTHM GROUP

TEMPO

PROGRAM

SOUND GROUP

SEQUENCER

EASY

SPLIT

POINT

SOUND

FUNK

BALLROOM

SHOW

GUITAR

SAX

ORGAN

SOUND

PROGRAM

MENUS

DISK

MAIN

MODE

OFF/ON

PLAY

OUT ARRANGER

ROCK

SOUL

DISCO POP BALLAD BALLAD

STRINGS VOCAL HARPSI BRASS WOODWIND ACCORDION SYNTH EXPLORER

PLAY

REC

VORITES

DISK

LOAD

VOLUME

MAX

SET

CHORD FINDER

CHORD STEP REC

WALTZ

TRAD SWING WORLD MEMORY

JAZZ

LATIN

MALLET

PIANO

ORCH

DIGITAL

CONDUCTOR

RIGHT

DIGITAL

EFFECT

MULTI

EFFECT CHORUS REVERB

PROGRESSIVE

PIANIST

BEAT

16 BEAT

USA

BASS ORCH PERC WORLD MIXTURES MIXTURES DRAWBARS DRUM KITS MEMORY

LEFT

RIGHT

PIANO STYLIST

CONTRAST

OFF

MIN

P.MEM 5-8

LOAD

BEAT

MUSIC STYLE ARRANGER

VARIATION

FILL IN

INTRO

ENDING

SYNCHRO

BREAK

START

STOP

TAP TEMPO

TRANSPOSE

PARTS/TR

DISPLAY

HOLD EXIT

GRAND UPRIGHT ELECTRIC MODERN

SIMPLE PIANO

TECHNI-CHORD

BANK

SET

DEMO

MUTE

PAGE

SEQUENCER COUNT

RESET INTRO

PIANO

PANEL MEMORY

1.Insert the disk into the Disk Drive slot. Push it

I About the menu

all the way in until you hear a click.

• On this instrument, if the normal display is active, it auto-

matically changes to the DISK MENU display when a disk

is inserted into the Disk Drive (initialized settings). The

PREFERENCES menu is used to specify which display is

shown when a disk is inserted.

2.Select a menu on the DISK MENU display.

• If the DISK MENU display does not appear, turn on the

DISK button.

LOAD (page 93)

Load data from a disk into this instrument’s

memory.

3.Follow the procedure for the function (see

below).

• When function is being set, if the TEMPO/PROGRAM

indicator is lit, the TEMPO/PROGRAM is available for

setting the current function.

SAVE (page 97)

Save data from this instrument’s memory to a

disk.

4.When you have finished setting the functions,

DIRECT PLAY (page 95)

turn off the DISK button.

Direct playback of SMF etc. commercial song

disks and medley playback.

DISK

IN USE

DISK

SONG MEDLEY (page 96)

Medley playback of songs in the disk (Tech-

nics format).

LOAD

Ⅲ DISK IN USE

DISK TOOLS (page 99)

Disk management procedures, such as disk

format.

DISK

IN USE

DISK

LOAD

PREFERENCES (page 100)

Used to specify which screen is to be jumped

to as well as the preferred file when a disk is

inserted.

This indicator lights when data is being loaded or

saved.

• To prevent data loss, do not eject the disk or turn off the

power while this indicator is lit.

DISK IN USE

QQTG0701

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Part V

Disk Drive

Loading data

Recall (load) the data from the disk to this instrument’s memories.

•

Note that the load procedure causes any data which is currently stored in the relevant memories to be erased.

LOAD

• The display looks similar to the following.

Load data that saved to a disk into this instru-

ment’s memory.

1.Insert the disk with the stored data into the

Disk Drive. Push it all the way in until you hear

a click.

2.Use the buttons below the display to specify

the types of data you wish to load (YES/NO).

• - - - - - indicates that this type of data has not been saved.

• This setting is canceled when you quit the LOAD display

or when another file is selected.

3.Press the LOAD button.

• The LOAD operation begins.

2.On the DISK MENU display, select LOAD.

• The display looks similar to the following.

Ⅲ SINGLE LOAD

You can specify which data to load from a disk

into a specific PANEL MEMORY, COMPOSER

(MEMORY), SOUND MEMORY, EFFECT

MEMORY or SEQUENCER (when SONG SAVE

was executed) memory.

1.Use the PAGE buttons to access the PAGE

3/3 SINGLE LOAD display.

• The display looks similar to the following.

• If there are only SMF files on the disk, the display auto-

matically changes to the SMF LOAD display.

3.Use the buttons below the display to select the

song (Technics file) you wish to load.

• If there are SMF files on the disk and you wish to load an

SMF file, press the SMF button. (Refer to next page.)

4.Press the LOAD button.

• The LOAD operation begins.

• When the operation has been successfully completed,

“COMPLETED!” is shown on the display.

• If song data was loaded, you can press the

START/STOP button to begin playback when the

SEQUENCER PLAY display is active.

• You can load the type of data for which only one song

can be recorded in the SEQUENCER. (This type is avail-

able for disks used with older Technics models.) Note,

however, that in this case, the song is loaded into SONG

1, but the data in SONG memories 2 to 10 are erased.

• You can also access the LOAD display by pressing the

DISK button for a few seconds.

2.Use the MODE button to select the data you

wish to load.

3.Use the BANK/SINGLE button to select the

load increment. (except for SEQUENCER)

BANK:

Load one bank at a time.

SINGLE:

Load the smallest data increment.

Ⅲ LOAD OPTION

Specify the kind of data you wish to load from the

disk to your instrument.

4.Follow the appropriate procedure to load the

specified data.

• Specify the data source for SONG (left side), and the

data destination (this instrument’s memory location) for

TO.

1.Use the PAGE buttons to access the PAGE

2/3 LOAD OPTION display.

QQTG0701

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Part V

Disk Drive

Ⅲ SMF LOAD

Load data which was saved in the “Standard

MIDI File” (SMF) format.

5.Press the LOAD button.

• The LOAD operation begins.

• When the operation has been successfully completed,

“COMPLETED!” is shown on the display.

• If you press the START/STOP button, playback of the

loaded data begins.

1.On the LOAD (PAGE 1/3) display, press the

SMF button.

• The display looks similar to the following.

• During the LOAD operation, data that cannot be pro-

cessed by this instrument is ignored.

Ⅲ COMPOSER LOAD

Load COMPOSER data only from a disk.

1.In the RHYTHM GROUP section, press and

hold the LOAD (MEMORY) button for a few

seconds.

RHYTHM GROUP

• For disks which contain SMF files only, this display

appears automatically when LOAD is selected on the

DISK MENU display.

FUNK &

BALLROOM

METRONOME POP

ROCK

SOUL

DISCO POP BALLAD BALLAD & SHOW

2.Use the buttons below the display to select the

WALTZ

JAZZ & LATIN &

filename you wish to load.

8 BEAT 16 BEAT

USA

& TRAD SWING WORLD MEMORY

• If the number of files is 10 or more, you can use the

PREV and NEXT buttons to go back or advance 10 files

at a time.

LOAD

• If you press the TECH button, the display changes to the

LOAD display for Technics format.

• You can use the INFORMATION button to switch the dis-

played data.

• The display looks similar to the following.

DISK: Disk name

SONG: Song name

3.Use the TO SONG button to select the num-

ber to load to (this instrument’s SEQUENCER

song number).

• Songs to load are specified one at a time.

• The song name to load to is shown below the TO SONG

button.

2.Select the name of the file you wish to load.

4.Use the LOAD AS button to specify the load

method.

3.Press the LOAD button.

• Data is loaded to this instrument’s COMPOSER memory

(MEMORY).

Select from the following.

GM/GM2 → GM2:

Activate the GM2 initialized settings, and

load GM/GM2 data.

NX → NX:

Active the NX SOUND settings, and load

NX data.

GM/GM2 → NX:

Activate the NX SOUND initialized settings,

and load GM/GM2 data.

PREV. TEC → NX:

Activate the NX SOUND initialized settings,

and load SMF data that was saved in the

TECHNICS mode on a previous model.

(The volume balance and octave settings

may differ from the saved settings.)

• If you select the setting which is different from that in

which the song was stored, the sounds, octaves, and

arrangement of percussion instrument sounds, etc. will

be different.

QQTG0701

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Part V

Disk Drive

Direct Play

You can enjoy immediate playback of “Standard MIDI File” (SMF), “Disk Orchestra Collection” (DOC) and

“PianoDisc” disks—all without loading the song data.

1.Insert the disk with the stored data into the

Disk Drive.

Ⅲ The display during playback

<Example: SMF>

2.On the DISK MENU display, select DIRECT

PLAY.

• The display looks similar to the following.

<Example: SMF>

Next song

Fast forward

Play/pause

Stop

3.Use the buttons below the display to select the

Previous song

song you wish to have played.

• If the number of files is 10 or more, you can use the

PREV and NEXT buttons to go back or advance 10 files

at a time.

• During playback, the buttons below the display are used

for player functions such as fast forward, pause, etc.

• During playback, if you press the MIXER button you can

change the settings for each part.

• If you press the MIC button during playback, the display

changes to the MIC REVERB & EFFECT setting display.

• For SMF files, use the PLAY AS button to specify a

sound arrangement mode.

GM2: GENERAL MIDI LEVEL 2

NX: NX SOUND

PREV. TEC: Data from Technics instruments

not having NX SOUND capability.

• For SMF files, you can use the INFO button to switch the

displayed data.

• For SMF disks:

For “SMF with LYRICS” disks, by pressing the LYRICS

button, the lyrics are shown on the display.

For a “minus one” performance, use the TRACK MUTE

∧^,∨ ^{buttons to select the channel you wish to mute. Use}

the ON/OFF buttons and set the track you want to MUTE

to ON. Following this, you can play a keyboard perfor-

mance on the channel which was last set to MUTE.

• For DOC disks:

You can use the CH 1, CH 2 and ORC (other accompani-

ment parts) buttons to set the respective parts to ON or

OFF.

• For PIANO DISC playback:

You can use the CH 1 and ORCH (other accompaniment

parts) buttons to set the respective parts to ON or OFF.

DISK: Disk name

SONG: Song name

• For SMF files, use the MIDI OUT button to specify

whether or not MIDI data is output during playback

(ON/OFF). (This cannot be changed during playback.)

4.Press the START button.

• The selected song is played back.

Ⅲ Adjusting the playback tempo

Even with a song having recorded tempo data,

you can use TEMPO/PROGRAM or TAP

TEMPO to adjust the tempo to your liking.

• When the tempo is changed, all the tempo data of that

song is automatically changed by the same ratio. Accord-

ingly, even in song data in which tempo change data is

stored, a single adjustment of the tempo produces a nat-

ural-sounding playback.

QQTG0701

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Part V

Disk Drive

Ⅲ MEDLEY PLAY

With DIRECT PLAY, songs saved on a disk can

be played back continuously in a medley.

2.Press the START button.

• Medley playback begins.

• During medley playback, you can use the SKIP button to

skip to the next song.

1.On the DIRECT PLAY display, set the MED-

LEY settings.

• If ALL is pressed, all the files are selected, and the songs

are played back in order in a medley. If ALL is pressed

again, the files are deselected.

• You can use the buttons below the display to select a

song to add to the song list, then press the ADD button to

add it to the list. Repeat these steps to create your own

list of songs to have played back. M01, M02 etc. next to

the file name indicates its order in the list.

• If the number of files is 10 or more, you can use the

PREV and NEXT buttons to go back or advance 10 files

at a time.

• You can delete a marked file from the medley song list by

selecting it and pressing the ADD button.

• Use the LOOP button to specify ON or OFF for repeat

playback of the medley.

Song Medley

Songs saved from the SEQUENCER to a disk (disk data) in the TECHNICS FORMAT can be played back

in a medley.

• During a medley performance, if you press the MIXER

button you can change the settings for each part.

• During a medley performance, you can use the SKIP but-

ton to skip to the next song.

1.On the DISK MENU display, select SONG

MEDLEY from the display.

• The display looks similar to the following.

• If the disk contains SMF or other files, but no TECHNICS

FORMAT file, the display changes to the DIRECT PLAY

display.

2.Select the order of files in the medley.

• If ALL is pressed, all the files are selected, and the songs

are played back in numerical in a medley.

• You can select a file and song, then press the ADD but-

ton to add it to the song list. Repeat these steps to create

your own list of songs to have played back. M01, M02

etc. next to the file name indicates its order in the list.

• You can delete a marked file from the medley song list by

selecting it and pressing the ADD button.

• Use the LOOP button to specify ON or OFF for repeat

playback of the medley.

• You can use the MODE button to select the medley

mode.

10 SNGS:

Songs 1 to 10 from each SONG are

played in a medley.

1 SONG:

Only song 1 from each SONG is played

back in a medley.

3.Press the START button.

• Medley playback begins.

• During the performance, the display changes to the play-

back display.

QQTG0701

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Part V

Disk Drive

Saving data

The recorded data and panel settings of this instrument can be saved on a disk.

Ⅲ TECHNICS FORMAT

Disks

You can use 3.5 inch 2DD (720KB) or 2HD

(1.44MB) disks.

• How to distinguish the two disk types:

2DD

2HD

No hole

1.Use the buttons below the display to specify

Hole

the file number you wish to save to.

• Although 2HD disks can hold more data and are conve-

nient for quick loading and saving, some models may be

able to read only 2DD disks. Therefore, you may not be

able to use your 2HD disk data with other musical instru-

ment models.

• The types of data that can be saved are shown in a frame

on the right side of the display. If you press the SAVE

button, all the indicated data is saved. Ordinarily PER-

FORMANCE data is selected, but you can use the SAVE

OPTION to select specific data to save.

• When saving data to the disk, the write-protect tab must

be closed.

2.If you wish to assign a name to the file, press

the NAME button.

• The display looks similar to the following.

Storage is not

possible

Storage is

possible

Open

Closed

3.Use the buttons below the display to assign a

name.

SAVE

• Set the character input position with the POSITION but-

tons, select the characters with the alphanumeric buttons

and repeat name assignment.

• Press the INS button to enter a space at the cursor posi-

tion.

1.Insert a formatted disk into the Disk Drive slot.

Push it all the way in until you hear a click.

• A disk which is used with this instrument for the first time

must first be formatted.

• Press the DEL button to erase the character at the cursor

position.

• Press the CLR button to erase the entire name.

• Press the →← button to center the name.

2.On the DISK MENU display, select SAVE.

• The display looks similar to the following.

4.Press the OK button.

• The display returns to the SAVE display.

5.Press the SAVE button.

• The SAVE operation begins.

• If you attempt to save data to a file number in which data

is currently saved, the display changes to the confirma-

tion display. Press the YES button to continue the SAVE

procedure, or press the NO button if you wish to cancel it.

3.Select the type of data save you want.

TECHNICS FORMAT:

Save this instrument’s data in the Technics

File format.

SMF FORMAT 0:

Save the SEQUENCER data in the “Stan-

dard MIDI File” format (FORMAT 0).

QQTG0701

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Part V

Disk Drive

Ⅲ SMF FORMAT 0

This instrument’s SEQUENCER data can be

saved in the “Standard MIDI File” format (FOR-

Specify the kind of data you wish to save to the

disk. To maximize effective use of disk memory

or to minimize the save time, select only the type

of data you wish to save.

MAT 0) for use on other instruments.

• What you can save in the SMF format (FORMAT 0) is

ordinary performance data, such as note data. Data such

as chord and rhythm data, COMPOSER data, etc. is not

saved. If you wish to also save this special Technics

data, save the data in the Technics File format.

• If you use the APC TO SMF CONVERT function of the

SEQUENCER, you can convert the patterns of the auto-

matic accompaniment, etc. to SMF data. (Refer to page

78.)

1.Use the PAGE buttons to access the 2/3

SAVE OPTION display.

• The display looks similar to the following.

2.Use the buttons below the display to specify

the types of data you wish to save (YES/NO).

• For PANEL MEMORY, select from NO/1 BANK/ALL.

Selecting 1 BANK will save only bank A.

1.To overwrite a file, use the L and M buttons

• Press the PERFORM button to select all the performance

data, or press the BACKUP button to select all the back

up data at once.

• If the ALL OFF button is pressed, all the settings change

to NO.

and then select a song name.

• If the number of files is 10 or more, you can use the

PREV and NEXT buttons to go back or advance 10 files

at a time.

2.If you wish to assign a name to the file, press

the NAME button.

3.Press the SAVE button.

• The SAVE operation begins.

3.Use the buttons below the display to assign a

name.

You can specify

single song in the

SEQUENCER to save to the disk.

4.Press the OK button.

• The display returns to the SAVE display.

1.Use the PAGE buttons to access the 3/3

SEQUENCER SONG SAVE display.

• The display looks similar to the following.

5.Use the FROM SONG buttons to select the

SEQUENCER song number you wish to save.

• The song name to save from is shown below the FROM

SONG button.

6.Use the PANEL HEADER buttons to specify

ON or OFF.

ON:

The sound and volume settings for each

part are saved as data at the beginning of

the file.

OFF:

2.Use the buttons below the display to select the

song number you wish to save.

This data is not saved.

3.Press the SAVE button.

• The SAVE operation begins.

7.Use the 1 MEASURE SPACE buttons to

select ON or OFF.

ON:

A one-measure space is added to the

beginning of the file.

OFF:

No space is added.

• When there is various data other than performance data

stored at the beginning of a file, the start of playback may

be delayed. This can be avoided by set the 1 MEASURE

SPACE to ON to inserting a before the beginning of the

performance.

QQTG0701

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Part V

Disk Drive

• When set to ON, a space is added each time a file is

saved. Therefore, if you have already saved a file once

with the 1 MEASURE SPACE set to ON, please set it to

OFF each time the file is subsequently saved.

9.Press the SAVE button.

• The SAVE operation begins.

• When the operation has been successfully completed,

“COMPLETED!” is shown on the display.

• If you attempt to save data to a file name in which data is

currently saved, the display changes to the confirmation

display. Press the YES button to continue the SAVE pro-

cedure, or press the NO button if you wish to cancel it.

8.Use the SAVE AS button to select the sound

generator mode (GM/GM2/NX).

Disk management

Various disk management procedures, such as file delete, file copy, and disk format, are available from

the DISK TOOLS menu.

DISK TOOLS

1.Insert the disk into the Disk Drive slot.

FORMAT display appears. Follow the instruc-

tions shown to format the disk.

• Note that this procedure clears any data which is cur-

rently stored on the disk.

2.On the DISK MENU display, select DISK

TOOLS from the display.

• The display looks similar to the following.

1.Select the type of format (2DD or 2HD).

• Be sure to select the type which is the same as your disk

type.

• If the type is automatically detected, the display changes

directly to the following display, without showing the type

select display.

• The display looks similar to the following.

3.Select a function and follow the procedure to

execute it.

• Use the buttons below the display to select a file.

• You can press the SMF/TECH button to change to the

display for procedures related to SMF/TECH files.

• Use the buttons to the left and right of the display to

access the corresponding setting display.

• If you wish to select the type again, use the PAGE button

to access the PAGE 2/2 display.

Ⅲ RENAME:

Assign a name to a file.

2.Press the YES button to format the disk, or

press the NO button to cancel the format.

• When the YES button is pressed, disk format begins.

After about 1–2 minutes, formatting is completed and

DISK NAMING display is shown.

Ⅲ DEL:

Delete a file.

Ⅲ COPY (TECH):

3.Use the buttons below the display to assign a

Copy a file.

name.

• Set the character input position with the POSITION but-

tons, select the characters with the alphanumeric buttons

and repeat name assignment.

Ⅲ MOVE (TECH):

Replace a file.

• Press the INS button to enter a space at the cursor posi-

tion.

• Press the DEL button to erase the character at the cursor

position.

• Press the CLR button to erase the entire name.

• Press the →← button to center the name.

Ⅲ INFO (DISK/SONG) (SMF files only):

Select whether to display the disk data or the

song names.

Ⅲ FORMAT

Disks which are used for the first time with this

instrument have to be formatted through the fol-

lowing procedure. When an unformatted disk is

inserted into the Disk Drive slot and you attempt

to execute the save or load procedure, the DISK

4.Press the OK button.

QQTG0701

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Part V

Disk Drive

Set the automatic display when a disk is

inserted

When a disk is inserted in the Disk Drive, the display automatically changes to a disk-procedure display.

Follow this procedure to customize the automatic display.

PREFERENCES

1.On the DISK MENU display, select PREFER-

ENCES.

• The display looks similar to the following.

2.Use the buttons to the left of the display to

select the item, and the ∧ and ∨ buttons to

change the setting.

DISK INSERT OPTION:

The display automatically changes to a disk-

procedure display when a disk is inserted in

the Disk Drive (OFF, DISK MENU, LOAD,

DIRECT PLAY, SONG MEDLEY).

• During playback, recording or changing the settings, the

displays unrelated to the settings made here do not

change.

FILE TYPE PRIORITY:

Specify the desired priority ranking of dis-

played files when several types of files are

recorded on one disk (TECHNICS/SMF).

3.Press the OK button.

100

QQTG0701

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Part VI Sound

Outline of the Sound

AUTO PLA

CHORD

ONE TOUCH

APC/SEQUENCER

VOLUME

FADE

RHYTHM GROUP

TEMPO

PROGRAM

SOUND GROUP

SEQUENCER

SPLIT

POINT

SOUND

FUNK

BALLROOM

SHOW

GUITAR

SAX

ORGAN

SOUND

EASY

REC

PROGRAM

MENUS

DISK

MAIN

MODE

OFF/ON

PLAY

OUT ARRANGER

ROCK

SOUL

DISCO POP BALLAD BALLAD

STRINGS VOCAL HARPSI BRASS WOODWIND ACCORDION SYNTH EXPLORER

PLAY

FAVORITES

DISK

LOAD

VOLUME

MAX

SET

CHORD FINDER

CHORD STEP REC

PIANO

ORCH

CONDUCTOR

RIGHT

DIGITAL

EFFECT

MULTI

EFFECT CHORUS REVERB

WALTZ

TRAD SWING WORLD MEMORY

JAZZ

LATIN

MALLET

DIGITAL

PROGRESSIVE

PIANIST

BEA

16 BEA

USA

BASS ORCH PERC WORLD MIXTURES MIXTURES DRAWBARS DRUM KITS MEMORY

LEFT

RIGHT

PIANO STYLIST

CONTRAST

OFF

MIN

.MEM 5-8

LOAD

BEA

MUSIC STYLE ARRANGER

VARIATION

FILL IN

INTRO

ENDING

SYNCHRO

BREAK

START

STOP

AP TEMPO

TRANSPOSE

PARTS/TR

DISPLAY

HOLD EXIT

GRAND UPRIGHT ELECTRIC MODERN

SIMPLE PIANO

TECHNI-CHORD

BANK

SET

DEMO

MUTE

PAGE

SEQUENCER COUNT

RESET INTRO

PIANO

PANEL MEMORY

The SOUND mode is used for making fine adjustments to the functions related to sound, such as tone,

and tuning.

1.Press the PROGRAM MENUS button to turn it

4.Follow the procedures on the corresponding

menu display.

on.

PROGRAM

MENUS

• When the TEMPO/PROGRAM indicator is lit, it indicates

that the TEMPO/PROGRAM is available for setting the

current function.

5.When you have finished setting the functions,

press the PROGRAM MENUS button to turn it

off.

• The display looks similar to the following.

Ⅲ A word about parts

The organization of the sound parts is as follows.

Normal parts:

RIGHT 1, RIGHT 2, LEFT, PART 1 to 16

• It is suggested that PART 10 be used for the DRUMS

part.

AUTO PLAY CHORD (automatic accompani-

ment) parts:

2.Select SOUND.

• The display looks similar to the following.

ACCOMP 1–5, BASS, DRUMS 1, 2, CHORD,

R.BASS.

3.Select the desired menu.

Summary of the SOUND menu items

PART SETTING (page 102)

Set the various sound attributes for each

part.

TECHNI-CHORD

Select the TECHNI-CHORD harmony style.

(Refer to page 40.)

MIXER (page 104)

APC REVERB SETTING (page 107)

Adjust the degree of REVERB for each

automatic accompaniment part.

Use the MIXER display to visually adjust

the major settings of each part.

MASTER TUNING (page 106)

SOUND ARRANGER

Select the type of tuning for the instrument.

The SOUND ARRANGER feature lets you

select other sounds for the AUTO PLAY

CHORD parts of each rhythm.

(Refer to page 49.)

KEY SCALING (page 106)

Select the type of scaling (tuning).

SOUND LOAD OPTION (page 107)

Specify whether the various data accompa-

nying a sound, such as effects, are used

when the sound is recalled.

101

QQTG0701

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Part VI

Sound

Part Setting

Set the various sound attributes for each part.

3.Use the buttons below the display to adjust

each attribute (explained in detail following).

• The settings display is comprised of 5 pages. Use the

PAGE buttons to switch pages.

Selecting an attribute

1.On the SOUND MENU display, select PART

SETTING.

4.When you have completed adjusting all of the

settings for one part, select another part and

repeat the adjustment procedure as desired.

2.Use the PART SELECT ∧ and ∨ buttons to

select the part.

• The settings and effects of the PAN, EFFECT etc. may

differ depending on the sound.

TUNING:

Use the TUNE ∧ and ∨ buttons to adjust the fine

tuning (−128 to +127).

^{• The}∨ ^{button is used to lower the pitch, and the}∧ ^button

to raise the pitch.

SOUND:

Use the SOUND ∧ and ∨ buttons to select a

sound.

• The buttons on the control panel may also be used to

select a sound.

VOLUME:

REVERB DEPTH:

Use the VOL ∧ and ∨ buttons to adjust the vol-

Use the REVERB ∧ and ∨ buttons to adjust the

ume (0 to 127).

depth of the REVERB (0 to 127).

PAN:

DIGITAL EFFECT:

Use the DIG. EFFECT ON/OFF buttons to set

the DIGITAL EFFECT to on or off.

Use the PAN ∧ and ∨ buttons to adjust the ste-

reo balance (L64–CENTER(CTR)–R63).

• At L64, the sound is completely to the left, at R63 com-

pletely to the right. At CENTER, the sound is at the cen-

ter. The display indicates the selected position.

CHORUS:

Use the CHORUS ON/OFF button to set the

CHORUS to on or off. Use the ∧ and ∨ buttons

to adjust the depth of the effect (0 to 127).

• Even at the same numerical value, the stereo balance

may differ slightly depending on the sound.

SUS PEDAL:

MULTI:

Use the SUSTAIN ∧ and ∨ buttons to adjust the

length of the sustain (1-8). Use the ON/OFF but-

tons to enable or disable the sustain effect, when

the sustain pedal is depressed.

Use the MULTI ON/OFF button to set the MULTI

EFFECT to on or off. Use the ∧ and ∨ buttons to

adjust the depth of the effect (0 to 127).

KEY SHIFT:

Use the KEY ∧ and ∨ buttons to specify the

amount of key shift (−24 to +24).

• A value of 1 means a shift of one semi-tone. To raise (or

lower) the pitch one octave, set the value to +12 (or −12).

^{• The}∨ ^{button is used to lower the pitch, and the}∧ ^button

to raise the pitch.

102

QQTG0701

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Part VI

Sound

EQ LOW:

Use the EQ LOW FC, GAIN ∧ and ∨ buttons to

adjust the sound quality in the lower range.

EQ HIGH:

Use the EQ HIGH FC, GAIN ∧ and ∨ buttons to

adjust the sound quality in the upper range.

GLIDE PEDAL:

Use the GLIDE ON/OFF buttons to enable or dis-

able the glide effect, if it has been assigned to

the pedal.

MONO/POLY MODE:

Use the MONO/POLY ∧ and ∨ buttons to select

the output mode.

• For pedal settings, refer to page 120.

PORTAMENTO:

ORIGINAL TUNING:

Use the ORIG ON/OFF button to enable or dis-

able the tuning for each sound.

• For details about ORIGINAL TUNING, refer to page 106.

Use the PORTAMENTO ON/OFF buttons to

enable or disable the portamento function. (Por-

tamento is a continuous gliding movement from

one tone to another.)

Use the ∧ and ∨ buttons to specify the porta-

mento time.

• PORTAMENTO does not function for the POLY MODE.

MODULATION SENSITIVITY:

Use the MOD SENS ∧ and ∨ buttons to adjust

the sensitivity of the MODULATION (when MIDI

data is recieved).

^{• Use the MSB}∧ ^and∨ ^{buttons (half-tone increments)}

^{and the LSB}∧ ^and∨ ^{buttons to adjust the setting.}

FILTER RESONANCE:

BEND RANGE:

Use the RESO ∧ and ∨ buttons to adjust the

Use the BEND RANGE ∧ and ∨ buttons to spec-

amount of resonance (0 to 127).

ify the PITCH BEND range (0 to 12). Increments

are in semi-tones.

• The higher the number, the greater the change in pitch

when PITCH BEND data is received as MIDI data.

ATTACK TIME:

Use the ATT ∧ and ∨ buttons to specify the

attack time (0 to 127).

DECAY TIME:

Use the DEC ∧ and ∨ buttons to specify the

decay time (0 to 127).

RELEASE TIME:

Use the REL ∧ and ∨ buttons to specify the

release time (0 to 127).

BRIGHTNESS:

Use the BRI ∧ and ∨ buttons to adjust the bright-

ness of the sound (0 to 127).

VIBRATO RATE:

Use the RATE ∧ and ∨ buttons to specify the

vibrato speed (0 to 127).

VIBRATO DEPTH:

Use the DEP ∧ and ∨ buttons to specify the

vibrato depth (0 to 127).

VIBRATO DELAY:

Use the DEL ∧ and ∨ buttons to specify the time

interval from when the keys are played until the

vibrato starts (0 to 127).

• The center value is 64 ( 0).

103

QQTG0701

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Part VI

Sound

Mixer

Use the MIXER display to visually adjust the major settings of each part. Use this display to make broad,

general changes to the settings.

1.On the SOUND MENU display, select MIXER.

• The MIXER display consists of 5 pages. Use the PAGE

buttons to switch among the pages.

• Each time the OTHER PARTS/TR button is pressed, the

part that is displayed changes.

MULTI:

Select MULTI. Use the buttons below the dis-

play to set the MULTI EFFECT to ON or OFF

for each part.

• Even at the same numerical value, the PAN and effects

may differ depending on the sound.

• For some parts, such as the automatic accompaniment

parts, the items that can be adjusted are limited.

MULTI DEPTH:

Select MULTI DEPTH. Use the buttons below

the display to adjust the depth of the MULTI

EFFECT for the corresponding part (0 to 127).

2.Adjust each parameter.

SOUND:

DIGITAL EFFECT:

Select SOUND. Use the buttons below the

display to set the sound for the corresponding

Select DIGITAL EFF. Use the buttons below

the display to set the DIGITAL EFFECT to ON

or OFF for the corresponding part.

part.

• The buttons in the SOUND GROUP can also be used to

select the sound.

CHORUS:

Select CHORUS. Use the buttons below the

display to set the CHORUS to ON or OFF for

each part.

PAN:

Select PAN. Use the buttons below the display

to adjust the stereo balance of the corre-

sponding part (L64–CTR–R63).

CHORUS DEPTH:

Select CHORUS DEPTH. Use the buttons

below the display to set the depth of the CHO-

RUS for the corresponding part (0 to 127).

VOLUME:

Select VOLUME. Use the buttons below the

display to adjust the volume of the corre-

sponding part (0 to 127).

• To mute a part, press both the corresponding balance

buttons as the same time. To cancel the mute, press

either balance button for the part.

EQUALIZER HIGH:

Sound quality correction in the high range.

Select EQUALIZER HI FC; use the buttons

below the display to set the standard fre-

quency. Select EQUALIZER HI GAIN; use the

buttons below the display to set the ratio of

change.

REVERB:

Select REVERB. Use the buttons below the

display to set the level of the REVERB for the

corresponding part (0 to 127).

104

QQTG0701

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Part VI

Sound

EQUALIZER LOW:

VIBRATO RATE:

Sound quality correction in the low range.

Select EQUALIZER LOW FC; use the buttons

below the display to set the standard fre-

quency. Select EQUALIZER LOW GAIN; use

the buttons below the display to set the ratio of

change.

Select VIBRATO RATE. Use the buttons

below the display to adjust the vibrato speed

for each part (0 to 127).

VIBRATO DEPTH:

Select VIBRATO DEPTH. Use the buttons

below the display to adjust the vibrato depth

for each part (0 to 127).

VIBRATO DELAY:

Select VIBRATO DELAY. Use the buttons

below the display to specify the time interval

from when the keys are played until the vibrato

starts for each part (0 to 127).

FILTER RESONANCE:

Select FILTER RESONANCE. Use the but-

tons below the display to set the amount of

resonance applied to each part (0 to 127).

KEY SHIFT:

Select KEY SHIFT. Use the buttons below the

display to adjust the shift width of the output

pitch of each part (in semitone increments;

–24 to +24).

MIDI CHANNEL:

Select MIDI CHANNEL. Use the balance but-

tons below the display to set the MIDI channel

for each part (OFF, CH1–CH16).

• Information about MIDI channels can be found on page

127.

LOCAL CONTROL:

BRIGHTNESS:

Select LOCAL CONTROL. Use the balance

buttons below the display to turn LOCAL

CONTROL ON or OFF for each part.

Select BRIGHTNESS. Use the buttons below

the display to set the amount of brightness

applied to each part (0 to 127).

Ⅲ EDIT MIXER

ATTACK TIME:

If you press the EDIT MIXER button on the

PAGE 5/5 display, the display changes the set-

ting display to modify the sounds.

Select ATTACK TIME. Use the buttons below

the display to set the sound attack time for

each part (0 to 127).

DECAY TIME:

Select DECAY TIME. Use the buttons below

the display to set the sound decay time for

each part (0 to 127).

RELEASE TIME:

Select RELEASE TIME. Use the buttons

below the display to set the release time for

each part (0 to 127).

105

QQTG0701

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Part VI

Sound

Master Tuning

This setting is used to fine-tune the pitch of the entire instrument. This is convenient when this instrument

is played with other instruments or with a recorded performance.

1.On the SOUND MENU display, select

MASTER TUNING.

• The display changes to the following.

2.Use the ∧ and ∨ buttons to adjust the pitch.

Key Scaling

For each part you can change the tuning of each key within a one-octave range. In addition to equal tem-

perament tuning, you can perform in other types of scales, for example Arabic tuning.

1.On the SOUND MENU display, select KEY

7.Press the SET button.

• The OCTAVE TUNING for the specified type and key is

automatically set.

SCALING.

• The display looks similar to the following.

I Settings for each key.

On the KEY SCALING display, you can adjust

the tuning for each key.

ᮤ

After selecting a key with the KEY SELECT

and

ᮣ

buttons, the pitch can be adjusted using

the TUNING ∧ and ∨ buttons.

• The pitch can be raised or lowered by a maximum of one

half-tone.

2.Press the OCTAVE TUNING TEMPLATE but-

ton.

• The display looks similar to the following.

^{• You can use the PART SELECT}∧ ^and∨ ^{buttons to}

switch the part.

• Use the ALL PARTS INITIAL button to return all parts to

the flat tuning.

Ⅲ ORIGINAL tuning

Each instrument of each sound has its own origi-

nal tuning data. This setting affects the tuning

curve that spans the entire keyboard. So, for

example, the acoustic piano-type sounds dupli-

cate those of a real piano, in that the high notes

are tuned slightly higher and the low notes

slightly lower.

3.Use the PART ∧ and ∨ buttons to select the

part to set.

• If ALL is selected, all the parts are set at once.

You can specify for each part whether this origi-

nal tuning is enabled or not.

4.Use the TYPE ∧ and ∨ buttons to select the

type of tuning.

1.Use the PART SELECT ∧ and ∨ buttons to

• Select from FLAT, WERCKMEISTER, KIRNBERGER,

ARABIC 1 to 5, SLENDRO, and PELOG.

select a part.

2.Use the ORIGINAL TUNING ON/OFF button

to select ON or OFF.

5.Use the SHIFT ∧ and ∨ buttons to select the

key to perform in.

6.Repeat steps 3 to 5 for each part, as neces-

sary.

106

QQTG0701

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Part VI

Sound

Sound Load Option

The data for each individual sound is set with the most suitable effect settings, etc., but in some cases

when switching from one sound to another and these settings are recalled, the setup is not the way you

want it. By using the SOUND LOAD OPTION, you can adjust the settings so that specific data is not

recalled.

1.On the SOUND MENU display, select SOUND

LOAD OPTION.

• The display looks similar to the following.

2.Use the L and M buttons to select an item.

Use the ∧ and ∨ button to set the filter to ON

or OFF.

APC Reverb Setting

Although an appropriate REVERB is applied for the automatic accompaniment parts depending on the

rhythms by default, you can adjust the REVERB level for each part.

1.On the SOUND MENU display, select APC

REVERB SETTING.

• The display looks similar to the following.

2.Use the PART L and M buttons to select the

part, the DEPTH ∧ and ∨ buttons to set the

value (PRESET IN RHYTHM, 0 – 127).

• PRESET IN RHYTHM is an optimal preset value for each

rhythm for use with the APC Reverb Setting.

107

QQTG0701

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Part VII Reverb & Effect

Outline of the

AUTO PLA

CHORD

ONE TOUCH

APC/SEQUENCER

VOLUME

FADE

RHYTHM GROUP

TEMPO

PROGRAM

SOUND GROUP

SEQUENCER

SPLIT

POINT

SOUND

FUNK

BALLROOM

SHOW

GUITAR

SAX

ORGAN

SOUND

EASY

REC

PROGRAM

MENUS

DISK

MAIN

MODE

OFF/ON

PLAY

OUT ARRANGER

ROCK

SOUL

DISCO POP BALLAD BALLAD

STRINGS VOCAL HARPSI BRASS WOODWIND ACCORDION SYNTH EXPLORER

PLAY

FAVORITES

DISK

LOAD

VOLUME

MAX

SET

CHORD FINDER

CHORD STEP REC

PIANO

ORCH

CONDUCTOR

RIGHT

DIGITAL

EFFECT

MULTI

EFFECT CHORUS REVERB

WALTZ

TRAD SWING WORLD MEMORY

JAZZ

LATIN

MALLET

DIGITAL

PROGRESSIVE

PIANIST

BEA

16 BEA

USA

BASS ORCH PERC WORLD MIXTURES MIXTURES DRAWBARS DRUM KITS MEMORY

LEFT

RIGHT

PIANO STYLIST

CONTRAST

OFF

MIN

.MEM 5-8

LOAD

BEA

MUSIC STYLE ARRANGER

VARIATION

FILL IN

INTRO

ENDING

SYNCHRO

BREAK

START

STOP

AP TEMPO

TRANSPOSE

PARTS/TR

DISPLAY

HOLD EXIT

GRAND UPRIGHT ELECTRIC MODERN

SIMPLE PIANO

TECHNI-CHORD

BANK

SET

DEMO

MUTE

PAGE

SEQUENCER COUNT

PIANO

PANEL MEMORY

Reverb & Effect

RESET INTRO

In the REVERB & EFFECT mode, you can make detailed settings related to this instrument’s effects.

1.Press the PROGRAM MENUS button to turn it

Summary of the REVERB & EFFECT

menu items

on.

TONE CONTROL

PROGRAM

MENUS

Settings for the entire instrument’s final out-

put sound quality.

REVERB:

REVERB type and detailed settings (page

38)

2.Select REVERB & EFFECT.

• The display looks similar to the following.

CHORUS:

CHORUS type and detailed settings (page

38)

MULTI:

MULTI EFFECT type and detailed settings

(page 37)

MIC REVERB & EFFECT:

Settings for the effects that are applied to

MIC. (page 39)

3.Select the desired menu.

4.Follow the procedures on the corresponding

menu display.

SOUND LOAD OPTION:

• When the TEMPO/PROGRAM indicator is lit, it indicates

that the TEMPO/PROGRAM is available for setting the

current function.

Specify whether the various data accompa-

nying a sound, such as effects, are used

when the sound is recalled. (page 107)

5.When you have finished setting the functions,

press the PROGRAM MENUS button to turn it

off.

MIXER:

Use the MIXER display to visually adjust

the major settings of each part. (page 104)

Tone Control

Settings for the entire instrument’s final output sound quality.

1.On the REVERB & EFFECT display, select

TONE CONTROL.

• The display looks similar to the following.

2.Use the BASS ∧ and ∨ buttons to adjust the

low range and the TREBLE ∧ and ∨ buttons

for the high range.

• Raising the settings excessively may cause distorted

sounds. Lower the setting or the MAIN VOLUME.

108

QQTG0701

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Part VIII Sound Edit

Outline of the Sound Edit

AUTO PLA

CHORD

ONE TOUCH

APC/SEQUENCER

VOLUME

FADE

RHYTHM GROUP

TEMPO

PROGRAM

SOUND GROUP

SEQUENCER

SPLIT

SOUND

FUNK

BALLROOM

SHOW

GUITAR

SAX

ORGAN

SOUND

EASY

PROGRAM

MENUS

DISK

MAIN

POINT

MODE

OFF/ON

PLAY

OUT ARRANGER

ROCK

SOUL

DISCO POP BALLAD BALLAD

STRINGS VOCAL HARPSI BRASS WOODWIND ACCORDION SYNTH EXPLORER

PLAY

REC

VORITES

DISK

LOAD

VOLUME

MAX

SET

CHORD FINDER

CHORD STEP REC

WALTZ

TRAD SWING WORLD MEMORY

JAZZ

LATIN

MALLET

PIANO

ORCH

DIGITAL

CONDUCTOR

RIGHT

DIGITAL

EFFECT

MULTI

EFFECT CHORUS REVERB

PROGRESSIVE

PIANIST

BEAT

16 BEAT

USA

BASS ORCH PERC WORLD MIXTURES MIXTURES DRAWBARS DRUM KITS MEMORY

LEFT

RIGHT

PIANO STYLIST

CONTRAST

OFF

MIN

P. M E M 5 - 8

LOAD

BEAT

MUSIC STYLE ARRANGER

VARIATION

FILL IN

INTRO

ENDING

SYNCHRO

BREAK

START

STOP

TAP TEMPO

TRANSPOSE

PARTS/TR

DISPLAY

HOLD EXIT

GRAND UPRIGHT ELECTRIC MODERN

SIMPLE PIANO

TECHNI-CHORD

BANK

SET

DEMO

MUTE

PAGE

SEQUENCER COUNT

RESET INTRO

PIANO

PANEL MEMORY

SOUND EDIT enables you to create your own new sound by altering one of the this instrument’s preset

sounds. Your new sound can be stored in one of the sound memory locations. SOUND EDIT has two

methods of use. You can edit in detail using functions more commonly associated with a synthesizer, or

you can use EASY EDIT which allows you to change some basic parameters on one page.

1.Select a sound to edit.

Summary of the SOUND EDIT menu items

2.Turn on the PROGRAM MENUS button.

EASY EDIT (page 110)

The most often used edit functions—such

as brightness and attack speed—are

PROGRAM

MENUS

assembled on one display for easy sound

modification.

TONE (page 110)

Modify the tones which make up the sound.

• The display looks similar to the following.

PITCH (page 113)

Adjust the settings related to the pitch.

FILTER (page 114)

Adjust the amount of frequency cut in spe-

cific frequency ranges.

AMPLITUDE (page 116)

3.Select SOUND EDIT.

Volume settings.

• The display looks similar to the following.

LFO (page 117)

Cyclic modulation settings.

EFFECT (page 118)

Settings related to the various effects

applied to the sound.

CONTROLLER (page 118)

4.Select the desired menu and follow the proce-

Specify how wheel operation etc. affects

the sound from MIDI.

dures on the corresponding setting display.

• To check the sound of a single tone, press the SOLO but-

ton to highlight the SOLO indication. Only the currently

selected tone sounds when a key is played.

• When DRUM KIT sounds are selected and the SOUND

EDIT is activated, the setting display looks different from

that for other sounds, but the basic operation is the same.

(To specify the percussion instrument you wish to edit,

^{use the}∧ ^and∨ ^{buttons to select the sound name, or}

alternatively, while pressing the keyboard key for the cor-

responding sound, press the NOTE SELECT button.)

• To edit the DIGITAL DRAWBAR settings, first adjust the

settings, then enter the SOUND EDIT mode, press the

WRITE button and follow the procedure on the display.

• When the TEMPO/PROGRAM indicator is lit, it indicates

that the TEMPO/PROGRAM is available for setting the

current function.

5.When the sound is just the way you like it, on

the SOUND EDIT MENU display press the

WRITE button to store your new sound.

• Press the EDITED (or ORIGINAL) button to switch

between the modified sound (EDITED) and the original

sound (ORIGINAL). This allows you to compare the

edited sound to the original sound as you are modifying

it.

109

QQTG0701

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Part VIII

Sound Edit

Easy Edit

The most commonly used edit functions are consolidated on one display, providing convenient and quick

editing operation.

1.On the SOUND EDIT menu display, select

Easy Edit items

EASY EDIT.

• The display changes to the following.

BRILLIANCE:

Adjust the brightness of the sound.

VIBRATO DEPTH:

Set vibrato depth.

VIBRATO SPEED:

Set vibrato speed.

2.Use the buttons below the display to specify

VIBRATO DELAY:

the value of the attribute.

Set time delay between key played and

vibrato start.

• An effect may remain unchanged when EASY EDIT is

used to set the value.

OCT SHIFT:

3.Press the WRITE button to store your new

Shift the octave range.

sound.

• Storing your new sound is explained on page 119.

• If a sound is stored in the EASY EDIT mode, and is later

selected in the EASY EDIT mode, the displayed value of

an attribute may be different from the value when it was

stored. The sound itself, however, is exactly as it was

stored.

ATTACK:

Adjust attack time.

RELEASE:

Adjust time of sound fade-out after key is

released.

Tone Edit

Modify the separate tones which comprise the sound.

About tones

A sound may be made up of at most four tones.

1st tone

2nd tone

SOUND

3rd tone

4th tone

110

QQTG0701

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Part VIII

Sound Edit

LEGATO:

TONE SELECT

Sound is emitted only when the key is played

legato.

1.On the SOUND EDIT menu, select TONE.

• The display looks similar to the following.

• Use the L and M buttons to select a setting item and

then the ∧ ^and∨ ^{buttons to specify a selection.}

^{• Select ON/OFF and use the}∧ and ∨ ^{buttons to select}

ON or OFF.

NON LEG:

Sound is not emitted when the key is played

legato.

PEDAL:

The sound is produced only while the SUS-

TAIN button is on.

CHORD:

The sound is emphasized when chords are

played (like the cutting sound of a guitar, for

example).

2.Use the buttons to the left of the display to

select the tone you wish to edit (1st, 2nd, 3rd,

4th).

Ⅲ TONE COPY

You can copy the tone of a particular sound to a

specified tone in the sound you are editing.

3.Select a sound for the tone.

^{• Select GROUP and use the}∧ ^and∨ ^{buttons to select}

^{the group, and select TONE NAME and use the}∧ ^and∨

buttons to select the sound.

1.On the 1/4 display, press the TONE COPY

button.

^{• A “}∗^{” mark in the DYNAMICS column indicates that a}

TONE DYNAMICS change was made to the sound.

2.Use the FROM ∧ and ∨ buttons to select the

tone to copy from.

4.Select LEVEL and use the ∧ and ∨ buttons to

^{• Use the OPTION}∧ ^and∨ ^{buttons to select the item you}

adjust the volume.

wish to copy.

5.Select KEY and use the ∧ and ∨ buttons to set

3.Use the TO ∧ and ∨ buttons to select the tone

the pitch of the output sound.

you wish to copy to.

6.Select DETUNE and use the ∧ and ∨ buttons

4.Press the OK button.

for fine adjustment of the pitch deviation.

• Tone copy is executed.

7.Select PANNING MODE and use the ∧ and ∨

buttons to select mode. (NORMAL, RANDOM,

KEY LAYER

STEREO R, STEREO L)

• If RANDOM, STEREO R or STEREO L is selected for the

MODE, the balance is fixed (cannot be moved).

Adjust the relation of tone output to keyboard

location.

8.Select PAN and use the ∧ and ∨ buttons to

1.Use the PAGE buttons to view the 2/4 display.

• The display looks similar to the following.

• Use the L and M buttons to select a setting item and

^{then the}∧ ^and∨ ^{buttons to specify a selection.}

adjust the stereo balance.

• CTR is the center point. At L64, the sound is all the way

to the left, at R63 all the way to the right.

9.Select DELAY and use the ∧ and ∨ buttons to

adjust the delay time of the sound.

• The higher the number, the longer the delay before

sound output.

10.Select TRIGGER and use the ∧ and ∨ but-

tons to select a trigger mode.

2.Use the buttons to the left of the display to

select a tone (1st, 2nd, 3rd or 4th).

KEY ON:

The normal mode, in which sound is emitted

when the key is played.

3.Select L-FADE and use the ∧ and ∨ buttons

and select LOW and use the ∧ and ∨ buttons

to define the area of the lower range of tone

KEY OFF:

Sound is emitted when the key is released

(like muted strings, for example).

output.

• By entering different values for the L-FADE and LOW set-

tings, you can define a sloping volume increase to the

peak output volume which corresponds to the note pitch.

111

QQTG0701

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Part VIII

Sound Edit

4.Select HIGH and use the ∧ and ∨ buttons and

select H-FADE and use the ∧ and ∨ buttons to

define the area of the higher range of tone out-

TONE DYNAMICS

You can adjust the settings so that a different

sound (tone) is output for each tone depending

on the velocity (how hard the keys are played).

put.

• By entering different values for the H-FADE and HIGH

settings, you can define a sloping volume decrease from

the peak output which corresponds to the note pitch.

• By overlapping the L-FADE and H-FADE curves of each

different tone, you can achieve a cross-fade effect, where

the sound gradually changes in relation to pitch.

1.Use the PAGE buttons to view the 4/4 display.

• The display looks similar to the following.

5.Repeat steps 2 to 4 for the other tones, as

desired.

VELOCITY LAYER

Adjust these settings to regulate the tone output

relative to the velocity.

2.Use the buttons to the left of the display to

select a tone.

1.Use the PAGE buttons to view the 3/4 display.

• The display looks similar to the following.

• Use the L and M buttons to select a setting item and

then the ∧ ^and∨ ^{buttons to specify a selection.}

3.Use the L and M buttons to select the column

for the function you wish to adjust.

4.Select the tone waveform.

^{• Use the GR}∧ ^and∨ ^{buttons to select the sound group.}

^{Use the TONE WAVEFORM}∧ ^and∨ ^{buttons to select}

the waveform.

5.Use the LEV ∧ and ∨ buttons to adjust the vol-

ume. Use the FLT ∧ and ∨ buttons to set the

sound.

6.Use the VELOCITY ∧ and ∨ buttons to specify

2.Use the buttons to the left of the display to

select a tone (1st, 2nd, 3rd or 4th).

the velocity range.

• When the upper limit of a waveform is set to 127, no

more waveforms can be added.

3.Select L-FADE and use the ∧ and ∨ buttons

and select LOW and use the ∧ and ∨ buttons

^{to define the}pp ^{sound output area for the}

lower range.

7.Repeat steps 3 to 6 to edit the other wave-

forms, as desired.

8.Repeat steps 2 to 7 for the other tones, as

desired.

4.Select HIGH and use the ∧ and ∨ buttons and

select H-FADE and use the ∧ and ∨ buttons to

^{define the}ff ^{sound output area for the higher}

range.

• By overlapping the L-FADE and H-FADE curves of each

different tone, you can change the way the tone sounds

relative to how hard or softly the keyboard is played.

5.Repeat steps 2 to 4 for the other tones, as

desired.

112

QQTG0701

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Part VIII

Sound Edit

Pitch Edit

Adjust the settings related to the pitch of the sound.

3.Adjust the settings for the pitch change enve-

KEY SHIFT & DETUNE

lope.

1.On the SOUND EDIT menu display, select

• Use the buttons below the display to set the correspond-

ing values. The envelope is created on the display as you

input the settings.

PITCH.

• The display looks similar to the following.

• Use the L and M buttons to select a setting item and

^{then the}∧ ^and∨ ^{buttons to specify a selection.}

^{• Select ON/OFF and use the}∧ ^and∨ ^{buttons to select}

ON or OFF.

^{• Select TOTAL DEPTH and use the}∧ ^and∨ ^{buttons to}

specify the maximum level.

^{• Select START PITCH and use the}∧ ^and∨ ^{buttons to}

^{set the start point. Select STOP PITCH and use the}∧

^and∨ ^{buttons to set the stop point.}

4.Repeat steps 2 and 3 for the other tones, as

desired.

PITCH ENVELOPE TOUCH & KEY

2.Use the buttons to the left of the display to

select a tone (1st, 2nd, 3rd or 4th).

Specify how the pitch envelope changes in rela-

tion to note pitch.

3.Select KEY SHIFT and use the ∧ and ∨ but-

tons to specify the output pitch.

• Units are in semitones.

1.Use the PAGE buttons to view the 3/3 display.

• Use the L and M buttons to select a setting item and

^{then the}∧ ^and∨ ^{buttons to specify a selection.}

4.Select DETUNE and use the ∧ and ∨ buttons

to fine-adjust the pitch.

• Slight differences in the DETUNE values between the

tones add fullness to the sound.

5.Select TONE SCALE and use the ∧ and ∨

buttons to select the type of scale (NORMAL,

1/2, 1/4, 1/8, 1/16, 1/32, 1/64, FIX).

• NORMAL is the normal scale type. For example, when

1/2 is selected, a difference in pitch between one key and

the adjacent key becomes half the normal pitch differ-

ence. When FIX is selected, the pitch is the same regard-

less of which key is played.

2.Use the buttons to left of the display to select a

tone.

3.Use the TOUCH ∧ and ∨ buttons to change

the respective touch settings.

^{• Select TIME and use the}∧ ^and∨ ^{buttons to specify the}

time change depending on touch. Select LEVEL and use

^the∧ ^and∨ ^{buttons to specify the pitch change level}

depending on touch.

• At a − setting, the softer the keys are pressed, the greater

the change. At a + setting, the harder the keys are

pressed, the greater the change.

PITCH ENVELOPE

Specify how the pitch changes over time, from

the time the key is played to the time the sound

dies out.

1.Use the PAGE buttons to view the 2/3 display.

• The display looks similar to the following.

• Use the L and M buttons to select a setting item and

^{then the}∧ ^and∨ ^{buttons to specify a selection.}

4.Change the key follow settings for the

ATTACK, DECAY and RELEASE.

^{• Use the}∧ ^and∨ ^{buttons corresponding to the ENVE-}

LOPE KEY FOLLOW attributes to adjust the settings.

^{Select CENTER and use the}∧ ^and∨ ^{buttons to select}

the center of the bend direction.

2.Use the buttons to the left of the display to

select a tone.

113

QQTG0701

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Part VIII

Sound Edit

Filter Edit

Make major changes to the sound by eliminating specific frequency ranges.

FILTER & EQUALIZER

1.On the SOUND EDIT menu, select FILTER.

• The display looks similar to the following.

• Use the L and M buttons to select a setting item and

^{then the}∧ ^and∨ ^{buttons to specify a selection.}

^{• Select ON/OFF and use the}∧ ^and∨ ^{buttons to select}

ON or OFF.

For LPF(6)+EQ/HPF(6)+EQ filters, the sound

quality can be modified by the EQUALIZER.

RANGE

Select the setting range (HIGH or LOW).

FREQUENCY

Set the standard frequency.

GAIN

Set the level increase or decrease from the

value set for FREQ (dB).

2.Use the buttons to the left of the display to

select a tone.

6.Repeat steps 2 to 5 for each tone, as desired.

3.Select MODE and use the ∧ and ∨ buttons to

TOUCH & KEY FOLLOW

select the filter mode.

Adjust how the filter is applied relative to touch

and pitch.

LPF(6)+EQ (low-pass filter + equalizer)

Signals higher than the cut-off frequency are

cut. Normal sounds are softened.

1.Use the PAGE buttons to view the 2/4 display.

• The display looks similar to the following.

• Use the L and M buttons to select a setting item and

^{then the}∧ ^and∨ ^{buttons to specify a selection.}

HPF(6)+EQ (high-pass filter + equalizer)

Signals lower than the cut-off frequency are

cut. Normal sounds are sharpened.

LPF24 (low-pass filter 24)

A stronger low-pass filter than LPF+EQ.

HPF24 (high-pass filter 24)

A stronger high-pass filter than HPF+EQ.

BPF (band-pass filter)

2.Use the buttons to the left of the display to

select a tone.

Cuts off signals that are not within in the area

between the two specified CUTOFF frequen-

cies.

3.Modify how the respective filters are applied

• For this mode, adjust the settings on the EQUAL-

IZER/FILTER side as well.

relative to key touch.

^{• Select TOUCH CUT OFF and use the}∧ ^and∨ ^{buttons to}

specify the amount of change in the cut-off frequency.

^{Select TOUCH CURVE and use the}∧ ^and∨ ^{buttons to}

specify the curve of change. Select TOUCH RESO-

^{NANCE and use the}∧ ^and∨ ^{buttons to specify the}

degree of change in the resonance value.

THRU

No filter effect is applied.

4.Use the CUTOFF ∧ and ∨ buttons to set the

frequency range which is cut by the filter.

4.Modify how the respective filters are applied

relative to note pitch.

5.Use the RESONANCE ∧ and ∨ buttons to

^{• Select KEY FOLLOW SLOPE and use the}∧ ^and∨ ^but-

tons to adjust the bend slope. Select KEY FOLLOW

^{RANGE (1–3) and use the}∧ ^and∨ ^{buttons to specify}

the pitch range.

specify the resonance value (dB).

• Resonance is effect which adds character to the sound

by emphasizing the harmonic components of frequencies

close to the cut-off frequency.

5.Repeat steps 2 to 4 for the other tones, as

desired.

114

QQTG0701

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Part VIII

Sound Edit

FILTER ENVELOPE

FILTER ENVELOPE TOUCH & KEY

Specify how the filter changes over time, from

the time the key is played to the time the sound

dies out.

Specify how the filter envelope (curve) changes

relative to touch or note pitch.

1.Use the PAGE buttons view the 3/4 display.

• The display looks similar to the following.

• Use the L and M buttons to select a setting item and

then the ∧ ^and∨ ^{buttons to specify a selection.}

1.Use the PAGE buttons to view the 4/4 display.

• The display looks similar to the following.

• Use the L and M buttons to select a setting item and

^{then the}∧ ^and∨ ^{buttons to specify a selection.}

2.Use the buttons to the left of the display to

select a tone.

2.Use the buttons to the left of the display to

select a tone.

3.Use the ∧ and ∨ buttons to modify the respec-

3.Modify how the respective filter envelopes

tive filter envelopes.

change relative to touch.

• Use the buttons below the display to adjust the respective

settings.

^{• You can select CUTOFF ADJUST and use the}∧ ^and∨

buttons to set the total upper and lower settings, the

START POINT to set the start point, and the STOP

POINT to set the stop point.

^{• Select TOUCH TIME and use the}∧ ^and∨ ^{buttons to}

specify the time change, and select TOUCH LEVEL and

^{use the}∧ ^and∨ ^{buttons to specify the level, relative to}

touch.

• At a − setting, the softer the keys are played, the greater

the change. At a + setting, the harder the keys are

played, the greater the change.

4.Repeat steps 2 and 3 for the other tones, as

desired.

4.Select KEY FOLLOW and use the ∧ and ∨

buttons to modify how the respective filter

envelopes change relative to note pitch.

• Adjust the respective slopes for attack, decay and

^{release. Select CENTER and use the}∧ ^and∨ ^{buttons to}

specify the center of the bend slope by note name.

115

QQTG0701

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Part VIII

Sound Edit

Amplitude Edit

Adjust the settings related to the volume of the sound.

• Use the L and M buttons to select a setting item and

then the ∧ ^and∨ ^{buttons to specify a selection.}

LEVEL

1.On the SOUND EDIT menu, select AMPLI-

TUDE.

• The display looks similar to the following.

• Use the L and M buttons to select a setting item and

then the ∧ ^and∨ ^{buttons to specify a selection.}

^{• Select ON/OFF and use the}∧ ^and∨ ^{buttons to select}

ON or OFF.

2.Use the buttons to the left of the display to

select a tone.

3.Adjust the settings for the volume envelope.

• Use the buttons below the display to set the correspond-

ing values. The envelope is created on the display as you

input the settings.

^{• Select SUSTAIN PEDAL and use the}∧ ^and∨ ^{buttons to}

2.Use the buttons to the left of the display to

select a tone.

^{• item and then the}∧ ^and∨ ^{buttons to specify a selection.}

select the type of sustain.

LONG:

Extend the release time of the sound.

HOLD:

3.Select LEVEL and use the ∧ and ∨ buttons to

select the volume.

Maintain the key-pressed condition.

4.Select TOUCH and use the ∧ and ∨ buttons to

4.Repeat steps 2 and 3 for the other tones, as

desired.

set the amount of volume change in relation to

how hard the keyboard is played.

• At a − value, the softer the keyboard is played, the louder

the sound. At a + value, the harder the keyboard is

played, the louder the sound.

ENVELOPE TOUCH & KEY FOLLOW

Specify how the volume changes relative to

touch or note pitch over time.

5.Select CURVE and use the ∧ and ∨ buttons to

select the type of volume curve depending on

touch.

1.Use the PAGE buttons to view the 3/3 display.

• Use the L and M buttons to select a setting item and

^{then the}∧ ^and∨ ^{buttons to specify a selection.}

6.Change the respective key follow settings.

^{• Select KEY FOLLOW SLOPE and use the}∧ ^and∨ ^but-

tons to adjust the bend slope. Select KEY FOLLOW

^{RANGE (1–3) and use the}∧ ^and∨ ^{buttons to specify}

the pitch range by note name.

7.Repeat steps 2 to 6 for the other tones, as

desired.

2.Use the buttons to the left of the display to

select a tone.

ENVELOPE

Specify how the volume changes over time, from

the time the key is played to the time the sound

dies out.

3.Change the touch settings.

^{• Select TOUCH ATTACK and use the}∧ and ∨ ^{buttons to}

specify the ATTACK time change depending on touch.

^{Select TOUCH DECAY and use the}∧ ^and∨ ^{buttons to}

specify the DECAY time change depending on touch.

• At a − setting, the softer the keys are pressed, the greater

the change. At a + setting, the harder the keys are

pressed, the greater the change.

1.Use the PAGE buttons to view the 2/3 display.

• The display looks similar to the following.

4.Change the key follow settings for the

ATTACK, DECAY and RELEASE.

• Select ^{RANGE (1–3) and use the}∧ ^and∨ ^{buttons to}

specify the keyboard range.

116

QQTG0701

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Part VIII

Sound Edit

LFO Edit

LFO can be applied to the pitch, amplitude, filter and/or pan to produce a cyclic modulation of the sound.

•

Twelve LFO groups can be used.

LFO

1.On the SOUND EDIT MENU display, select

6.Select TONE SETTINGS PHASE and use the

∧ and ∨ buttons to adjust the respective

parameters.

LFO.

• The display looks similar to the following.

• Use the L and M buttons to select a setting item and

^{then the}∧ ^and∨ ^{buttons to specify a selection.}

^{• Select ON/OFF and use the}∧ ^and∨ ^{buttons to select}

ON or OFF.

PHASE

Phase

• A + indicates normal phase, and a − indicates an inverted

phase.

WAVE

Modulate the waveform.

SINE: Sine wave

TRIANGLE: Triangle wave

SQUARE: Square wave

SAW TOOTH: Saw tooth wave

RANDOM: Irregular pattern

2.Use the PAGE buttons to select the respective

characteristics.

PAGE 1/4: PITCH (vibrato effect)

PAGE 2/4: AMPLITUDE (tremolo effect)

PAGE 3/4: FILTER (wah-wah effect)

PAGE 4/4: PANNING (auto pan effect)

DELAY

Delay time is the time elapsed from when the

keyboard key is pressed until the modulation

begins.

3.Use the buttons to the left of the display to

select a tone.

DEPTH

Modulation depth

4.Adjust the respective assigned LFO’s.

• LFO which share the same number on other displays are

also changed with this adjustment.

TOUCH

Degree of modulation change in relation to

touch

SELECT

7.Repeat steps 2 to 6 for the other tones, as

Select the assigned LFO number (1 to 12)

desired.

• You can press the OVERVIEW button to confirm the sta-

tus of each LFO setting.

SPEED

Adjust the modulation speed.

KEYSYNC

When playing more than one note, specify

whether the LFO starts or not each time a key

is pressed (ON/OFF).

• When KEYSYNC is set to ON: if, while playing one note,

you play a second note, the LFO is applied to the second

note as well.

PHASE

Degree of phase change.

5.Select CONNECTION and use the buttons to

specify whether or not the LFO is applied to

the tone.

• An arrow mark indicates that the LFO is applied.

117

QQTG0701

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Part VIII

Sound Edit

Effect Edit

These are settings related to the various effects applied to your edited sound.

Ⅲ DIGITAL EFFECT

EFFECT

1.Use the PAGE buttons to view the 2/2 display.

• The display looks similar to the following.

• The display for the effect type which is best-suited for the

sound currently being edited is selected.

1.On the SOUND EDIT menu display, select

EFFECT.

• The display looks similar to the following.

• The display is different by the MULTI EFFECT button on

or off.

2.Use the CHORUS ON/OFF buttons set CHO-

RUS to on or off. Use the respective DEPTH ∧

and ∨ buttons to specify how the CHORUS is

applied.

2.Use the TYPE ∧ and ∨ buttons to select the

type of effect.

3.Use the REVERB ADJUST ∧ and ∨ buttons to

Specify whether the DIGITAL EFFECT button

turns on or off when the sound is selected.

When set to ON, the DIGITAL EFFECT button

turns on automatically when the sound is

selected.

specify how the REVERB is applied.

4.Use the MONO/POLY ∧ and ∨ buttons to

select the sound output mode.

5.Use the PORTAMENTO ON/OFF buttons set

portamento to on or off. Use the TIME ∧ and ∨

buttons to set the portamento time.

Select stereo (STEREO) or monaural (MONO)

output of the effect.

• PORTAMENT does not function for the POLY.

3.Use the buttons along the bottom of the dis-

play to select the attribute you wish to adjust.

• When the type is changed, the parameters revert to the

factory defaults.

Controller Edit

Specify how operation of the controllers, such as the wheels, etc., affects the sound.

•

These settings are effective when the instrument recieves controller MIDI data.

CONTROLLER

• Two functions can be assigned to each controller.

1.On the SOUND EDIT menu display, select

CONTROLLER.

3.Use the FUNCTION ∧ and ∨ buttons to select

• The display looks similar to the following.

a function for the controller.

4.Use the DEPTH∧ and ∨ buttons to set the

depth of the function applied by the controller.

5.Use the ON/OFF ∧ and ∨ buttons to set the

controller to on or off for each tone.

• When set to INV, the effect is applied inversely.

2.Use the buttons to the left of the display to

select a controller.

118

QQTG0701

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Part VIII

Sound Edit

6.Repeat steps 2 to 5 for the other controllers,

as desired.

7.Use the GLIDE ∧ and ∨ buttons to select

whether or not the glide effect is active.

ENABLE:

The glide effect is enabled.

DISABLE:

The glide effect is disabled.

Store the new sound

The MEMORY button in the SOUND GROUP section accesses memory banks reserved for the sounds

you create with the SOUND EDIT. You can store up to 40 original sounds then select the sounds just like

the other sounds in the SOUND GROUP.

Procedure

1.When you have edited the sound to just the

way you like it, on the SOUND EDIT menu dis-

play press the WRITE button.

4.When you have finished typing the name,

press the OK button.

• The display returns to the MEMORY WRITE display.

• The display changes to the MEMORY WRITE display.

5.Use the ∧ and ∨ buttons to select the MEM-

ORY number in which to store the new sound

(1–40).

6.Press the OK button.

• The new sound is stored, and “COMPLETED!” is shown

on the display.

• The SOUND EDIT mode is turned off.

2.To assign a name to your new sound, press

• The stored sound memories can be saved on a disk for

recall at a later time. (Refer to page 97.)

the SOUND NAMING button.

• If you do not assign a name to your sound, the name

becomes the same as the original sound from which you

started. In this case, skip to step 5.

Select a new sound

• The display changes to the SOUND NAMING display.

You can select your original sound just like the

other sounds in the SOUND GROUP.

1.In the SOUND GROUP section, press the

MEMORY button.

MEMORY

3.Use the buttons below the display to assign a

name.

• The list of sounds is shown on the display.

• Set the character input position with the POSITION but-

tons, select the characters with the alphanumeric buttons

and repeat name assignment.

• Switch from upper to lower case letters with the ABC, abc

button.

2.Select the desired sound from the list on the

display.

• Use the !#$ button to switch to the symbols character set.

• Press the INS button to enter a space at the cursor posi-

tion.

• Press the DEL button to erase the character at the cursor

position.

• Press the CLR button to erase the entire name.

• Press the →← button to center the name.

119

QQTG0701

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Part IX Control

Outline of Control

functions

AUTO PLA

CHORD

ONE TOUCH

APC/SEQUENCER

VOLUME

FADE

RHYTHM GROUP

TEMPO

PROGRAM

SOUND GROUP

SEQUENCER

SPLIT

POINT

SOUND

FUNK

BALLROOM

SHOW

GUITAR

SAX

ORGAN

SOUND

EASY

REC

PROGRAM

MENUS

DISK

MAIN

MODE

OFF/ON

PLAY

OUT ARRANGER

ROCK

SOUL

DISCO POP BALLAD BALLAD

STRINGS VOCAL HARPSI BRASS WOODWIND ACCORDION SYNTH EXPLORER

PLAY

FAVORITES

DISK

LOAD

VOLUME

MAX

SET

CHORD FINDER

CHORD STEP REC

PIANO

ORCH

CONDUCTOR

RIGHT

DIGITAL

EFFECT

MULTI

EFFECT CHORUS REVERB

WALTZ

TRAD SWING WORLD MEMORY

JAZZ

LATIN

MALLET

DIGITAL

PROGRESSIVE

PIANIST

BEA

16 BEA

USA

BASS ORCH PERC WORLD MIXTURES MIXTURES DRAWBARS DRUM KITS MEMORY

LEFT

RIGHT

PIANO STYLIST

CONTRAST

OFF

MIN

.MEM 5-8

LOAD

BEA

MUSIC STYLE ARRANGER

VARIATION

FILL IN

INTRO

ENDING

SYNCHRO

BREAK

START

STOP

AP TEMPO

TRANSPOSE

PARTS/TR

DISPLAY

HOLD EXIT

GRAND UPRIGHT ELECTRIC MODERN

SIMPLE PIANO

TECHNI-CHORD

BANK

SET

DEMO

MUTE

PAGE

SEQUENCER COUNT

RESET INTRO

PIANO

ANEL MEMORY

Various settings related to the operation of this instrument are adjusted with the CONTROL functions.

1.Press the PROGRAM MENUS button to turn it

3.Select a function.

on.

INITIAL

PROGRAM

MENUS

Return the settings and memories to the

factory-preset status. (Refer to page 133.)

PEDAL SETTING

Various functions can be assigned to the soft

pedal.

• The display looks similar to the following.

PANEL MEMORY MODE

Define which panel settings are stored when

the PANEL MEMORY is used. (Refer to page

53.)

MUSIC STYLE ARRANGER MODE

Define which panel settings change by press-

ing a FILL IN button when the MUSIC STYLE

ARRANGER is used. (Refer to page 51.)

2.Select CONTROL.

• The display looks similar to the following.

FADE IN/OUT SETTING

Settings related to the FADE IN/FADE OUT.

(Refer to page 48.)

4.Follow the procedure to adjust the settings.

• While you are adjusting the settings, when the

TEMPO/PROGRAM indicator is lit, it indicates that the

TEMPO/PROGRAM is available for setting the current

function.

5.When you have finished setting the functions,

press the PROGRAM MENUS button to turn it

off.

Pedal Setting

By assigning one of the many programmable functions to the soft pedal, you can then control the function

during your performance just by pressing the pedal.

• The display looks similar to the following.

1.On the CONTROL MENU display, select

PEDAL SETTING.

120

QQTG0701

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Part IX

Control

2.Use the ∧ and ∨ buttons to select its function.

MULTI EFFECT:

MULTI EFFECT button on/off

OFF:

No function is assigned.

ROTARY SLOW/FAST:

TREMOLO SLOW/FAST of the DIGITAL

DRAWBAR

SOFT PEDAL:

Soft pedal on/off

MIC REVERB:

SOSTENUTO PEDAL*:

Sostenuto pedal on/off

MIC REVERB on/off

MIC EFFECT:

P. MEM INCREMENT:

MIC EFFECT on/off

Increment the PANEL MEMORY number

selection by 1.

PUNCH RECORD:

Punch in/Punch out (Refer to page 64.)

P. MEM DECREMENT:

Decrement the PANEL MEMORY number

selection by 1.

APC HOLD:

Memorize the chord specified for the auto-

matic accompaniment.

P. MEM BANK INC.:

Change to the next PANEL MEMORY bank in

FADE IN:

order.

FADE IN button on/off

P. MEM BANK DEC.:

FADE OUT:

Change to the previous PANEL MEMORY

FADE OUT button on/off

bank in order.

TAP TEMPO:

PANEL MEMORY 1 to 8:

The specified PANEL MEMORY number is

turned on.

TAP TEMPO button on

• If the PEDAL SETTING function in the DATA PROTEC-

TION menu is set to OFF, the setting contents may

change during song playback, etc. If you do not wish the

setting contents to change, set PEDAL SETTING to ON.

(Refer to page 124.)

• In the PROGRESSIVE PIANIST mode, if you set TURN

PAGE to MANUAL, the LEFT PEDAL functions to turn

the display page.

P. MEM INC.+DEC.:

Press the pedal to increment the PANEL

MEMORY number selection by one; release

the pedal to return to the previous number.

START/STOP:

* Sostenuto pedal

START/STOP button on/off

If this pedal is pressed while the keys are

pressed, the sustain effect is applied to those

notes only. If the pedal is pressed first and the

keys are then pressed, the sustain effect does

FILL IN 1:

FILL IN 1 button on

not work for those notes.

• For continuous-type sounds, such as ORGAN, the notes

sound as long as the pedal is pressed.

FILL IN 2:

FILL IN 2 button on

INTRO & ENDING 1:

INTRO & ENDING 1 button on

INTRO & ENDING 2:

INTRO & ENDING 2 button on

GLIDE:

Glide on/off (The glide effect “bends” the pitch

down by about one semitone.)

• This effect does not work for some sounds.

TECHNI-CHORD:

TECHNI-CHORD button on/off

DIGITAL EFFECT:

DIGITAL EFFECT button on/off

121

QQTG0701

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Part X Customize

Outline of Customize functions

AUTO PLA

CHORD

ONE TOUCH

APC/SEQUENCER

VOLUME

FADE

RHYTHM GROUP

TEMPO

PROGRAM

SOUND GROUP

SEQUENCER

SPLIT

POINT

SOUND

FUNK

BALLROOM

SHOW

GUITAR

SAX

ORGAN

SOUND

EASY

PROGRAM

MENUS

DISK

MAIN

MODE

OFF/ON

PLAY

OUT ARRANGER

ROCK

SOUL

DISCO POP BALLAD BALLAD

STRINGS VOCAL HARPSI BRASS WOODWIND ACCORDION SYNTH EXPLORER

PLAY

REC

VORITES

DISK

LOAD

VOLUME

MAX

SET

CHORD FINDER

CHORD STEP REC

WALTZ

TRAD SWING WORLD MEMORY

JAZZ

LATIN

MALLET

PIANO

ORCH

DIGITAL

CONDUCTOR

RIGHT

DIGITAL

EFFECT

MULTI

EFFECT CHORUS REVERB

PROGRESSIVE

PIANIST

BEAT

16 BEAT

USA

BASS ORCH PERC WORLD MIXTURES MIXTURES DRAWBARS DRUM KITS MEMORY

LEFT

RIGHT

PIANO STYLIST

CONTRAST

OFF

MIN

P. M E M 5 - 8

LOAD

BEAT

MUSIC STYLE ARRANGER

VARIATION

FILL IN

INTRO

ENDING

SYNCHRO

BREAK

START

STOP

TAP TEMPO

TRANSPOSE

PARTS/TR

DISPLAY

HOLD EXIT

GRAND UPRIGHT ELECTRIC MODERN

SIMPLE PIANO

TECHNI-CHORD

BANK

SET

DEMO

MUTE

PAGE

SEQUENCER COUNT

RESET INTRO

PIANO

PANEL MEMORY

Many of this instrument’s settings can be customized for maximum playing convenience and ease.

1.Press the PROGRAM MENUS button to turn it

DATA PROTECTION (page 124)

on.

Specify when you don’t want the data to

change in cases where it normally does, for

instance during disk load and when automatic

settings are made, etc.

• The display looks similar to the following.

MIDI SETTING LOAD OPTION (page 124)

Specify how MIDI data is handled when data

is loaded from a disk.

LANGUAGE SETTING

Select your preferred language for the dis-

2.Select CUSTOMIZE.

• The display looks similar to the following.

played messages.

• The display is different, but the operation is the same as

for HELP (page 29).

DISK PREFERENCES

Automatic display when a floppy disk is

inserted (page 100).

4.Follow the procedure to adjust the settings.

• While you are adjusting the settings, when the

TEMPO/PROGRAM indicator is lit, it indicates that the

TEMPO/PROGRAM is available for setting the current

function.

3.Select a function.

FAVORITES SETTING

FAVORITES display settings (page 30)

5.When you have finished setting the functions,

press the PROGRAM MENUS button to turn it

off.

DISPLAY TIME OUT (page 123)

Adjust settings related to the screen display.

122

QQTG0701

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Part X

Customize

Display Time Out

Numerous message displays and setting displays conveniently guide you through the operation steps of

this instrument. Once you become familiar with the operation of your instrument, however, you may wish

to shorten or even suspend the display time of the message displays.

1.On the CUSTOMIZE display, select DISPLAY

TIME OUT.

• The display looks similar to the following.

2.Use the DISPLAY TYPE L and M buttons to

select the function.

SAVE REMINDER:

Reminder display (OFF, DEFAULT, HOLD, 1

to 10 sec)

‘COMPLETED’ MESSAGE:

Operation successfully completed (OFF,

DEFAULT, HOLD, 1 to 10 sec)

ARE YOU SURE?:

Display requires user action for confirmation

(OFF, DEFAULT, HOLD)

ERROR MESSAGE:

Error notification display (DEFAULT, HOLD, 1

to 10 sec)

SOUND/RHYTHM SELECT:

Sound/Rhythm selection display (DEFAULT,

HOLD, 1 to 10 sec)

EASY SETTING:

Display time when the setting display was

accessed pressing and holding a panel button

(DEFAULT, HOLD, 1 to 10 sec)

• When set the OFF, the display will not appear.

• When set to DEFAULT, the display time returns to the ini-

tialized setting.

• You can specify 1 to 10 seconds for the display time.

• When set to HOLD, the DISPLAY HOLD automatically

turns on.

3.Use the TIME ∧ and ∨ buttons to change the

setting.

4.Press the OK button.

• Some messages may be displayed even if they are set to

OFF.

123

QQTG0701

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Part X

Customize

Data Protection

Data which you don’t want to change but which is normally overwritten during disk load, song change, or

the automatic setting functions, etc. can be protected from accidental overwriting.

1.In the CUSTOMIZE MENU display, select

DATA PROTECTION.

• The display looks similar to the following.

3.Use the ON/OFF button to select ON or OFF.

ON:

The data is protected and will not be

changed.

OFF:

The data is not retained.

4.Repeat steps 2 and 3 for each item.

5.Press the OK button.

2.Use the ITEM ∧ and ∨ buttons to select an

item.

MIDI Setting Load Option

Specify how MIDI data is handled when data is loaded from a disk.

1.On the CUSTOMIZE MENU display, select

MIDI SETTING LOAD OPTION.

• The display looks similar to the following.

Ⅲ Use these settings when:

GM2 mode ON:

Specify how the MIDI settings of this instru-

ment are affected when GM2 is on.

• Select from INITIAL, (initialized settings), PRESET (MIDI

PRESETS), and KEEP (the settings do not change).

NX SOUND mode ON:

Specify how the MIDI settings of this instru-

ment are affected when NX SOUND is ON.

• Select from INITIAL, (initialized settings), PRESET (MIDI

PRESETS), and KEEP (the settings do not change).

2.Use the L and M buttons to select an item.

3.Use the ∧ and ∨ buttons to change the set-

Ⅲ Load MIDI Parameters?

From Registration file:

ting.

Specify whether MIDI data is also loaded

when panel data is loaded (NO/YES).

4.Press the OK button.

From Sequencer Song:

Specify whether MIDI data is loaded or

changed when SEQUENCER data is loaded

or when the SONG is changed by the

SEQUENCER SONG SELECT, SONG COPY

or TRACK ASSIGN (NO/YES).

• The MIDI settings are always stored at the start of each

recorded SEQUENCER SONG and when PANEL

WRITE is executed. In the initialized state, the MIDI set-

tings are not loaded even when the SONG is changed.

However, changing this setting to YES will cause the

stored MIDI settings to also load in these cases.

124

QQTG0701

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Part XI MIDI

What is MIDI?

MIDI (Musical Instrument Digital Interface) is the international standard for digital communication of elec-

tronic musical instrument data. This means that any equipment which has a MIDI terminal—such as elec-

tronic musical instruments and personal computers—can easily exchange digital data with other MIDI

equipment without resorting to complicated conversions or connections.

MIDI terminals

(On the rear panel)

IN:

The terminal by which this instrument receives

data from other equipment.

OUT:

MIDI

OUT

The terminal that transmits data from this

instrument to other equipment.

• For these connections, use a commercially available

MIDI cable.

Connection examples

Ⅲ To generate sound from a connected instrument by playing this instrument

MIDI cable

OUT

This instrument

Another MIDI instrument

Ⅲ To generate sound from this instrument by operating a connected instrument

MIDI cable

OUT

This instrument

Another MIDI instrument

Ⅲ To connect with a MIDI sequencer

MIDI cable

OUT

This instrument

Another MIDI instrument

MIDI channels

Many different kinds of performance data are

sent using just one MIDI cable. This is possible

because MIDI signals are sent and received

through 16 different “basic channels” (numbered

1 to 16). In order for the exchange of data to take

place, the channels on the transmission side

must match the channels on the receiving side.

This characteristic also makes it possible to link

multiple sound generators and to control each by

matching specific channels.

125

QQTG0701

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Part XI

MIDI

Summary of the MIDI menu items

PART SETTING

MIDI PRESETS (page 131)

Set the MIDI CHANNEL, OCTAVE and

LOCAL CONTROL settings for each part.

Establish the optimum settings depending

on how this instrument is connected to

other equipment.

CONTROL MESSAGES (page 128)

Enable or disable the exchange of various

CONTROL data.

• You can save the settings you specify yourself.

MODE SETTING (page 130)

NX SOUND and GM LEVEL 2 ON setting

REALTIME MESSAGES (page 128)

Enable or disable the exchange of REAL-

TIME COMMANDS, and select the CLOCK

mode.

COMPUTER CONNECTION (page 132)

Mode settings related to the flow of MIDI

signals when this instrument is connected

to a personal computer.

COMMON SETTING (page 129)

Set the functions which are common to all

parts.

INPUT/OUTPUT SETTING (page 130)

Settings which determine how various per-

formance data is treated during data trans-

mission and reception.

Part Setting

Follow this procedure to set the functions which can be set for each part: MIDI CHANNELs, the OCTAVE

data to NOTE data during transmission, and LOCAL CONTROL (whether or not the sound generator of

this instrument is active during transmission).

• The initialized settings are as follows:

1.On the MIDI MENU display, select PART

SETTING.

RIGHT 1

RIGHT 2

LEFT

• The display looks similar to the following.

PART 1

PART 2

PART 3

PART 4

PART 5

PART 6

PART 7

PART 8

PART 9

PART 10

PART 11

PART 12

PART 13

PART 14

PART 15

PART 16

CONTROL

OFF

2.Use the PART L and M buttons to select a

part.

• The list of parts covers 4 pages. Use the OTHER

PARTS/TR button or PAGE button to view different parts.

3.Use the CHANNEL ∧ and ∨ buttons to select

a MIDI CHANNEL for the part (OFF, 1 to 16).

• A part which has been set to OFF cannot be used to

transmit or receive MIDI data.

ACCOMP 1 – 5 OFF

BASS

DRUMS 1 – 2

CHORD

OFF

127

QQTG0701

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Part XI

MIDI

4.Use the OCTAVE ∧ and ∨ buttons to set the

5.Use the LOCAL ∧ and ∨ buttons to enable or

octave shift value (−3 to 3).

disable this instrument’s sound generator.

• When set to ON, the performance from this instrument is

transmitted as MIDI data and also sounds from this

instrument. When set to OFF, the performance from this

instrument is transmitted as MIDI data but does not

sound from this instrument.

• Octave shift is set for transmitted data only; however the

transmitted and received octave shifts are linked. For

example, if the transmitted octave shift is set to 1, the

received octave shift is automatically set to −1.

6.Repeat steps 2 to 5 for each part as desired.

Control Messages

Enable or disable the exchange of various control data.

1.On the MIDI MENU display, select CONTROL

3.Use the ON and OFF ∧ and ∨ buttons to spec-

MESSAGES.

ify on or off for the control message.

• The display looks similar to the following.

• The CONTROL MESSAGES display consists of 3 pages.

Use the PAGE buttons to switch between pages.

ON:

Data for the control operation is exchanged.

OFF:

Data for the control operation is not

exchanged.

• The BANK SELECT setting is effective only when PRG.

CHANGE is set to ON.

• The EFFECT & REVERB setting controls the DIGITAL

EFFECT, CHORUS, MULTI and REVERB on/off.

• RPN is the general term for KEY SHIFT, TUNING, PITCH

BEND RANGE and MODULATION SENSITIVITY.

2.Use the MESSAGE L and M buttons to select

the control message.

4.Repeat steps 2 and 3 for each control as

desired.

Realtime Messages

Enable or disable the exchange of START/STOP data (REALTIME COMMANDS), and select the CLOCK

mode.

1.On the MIDI MENU display, select REALTIME

MESSAGES.

• The display looks similar to the following.

OFF:

This data cannot be transmitted/received.

CLOCK

INTERNAL:

This instrument’s internal clock is used to

control the performance. The clock of the

connected equipment is disabled.

MIDI:

The clock of the connected equipment is

used to control the performance. This

instrument’s clock is disabled. (The tempo

2.Use the buttons on the left side of the display

to select a function.

is displayed as “q = − − −”.)

• The CLOCK is set to INTERNAL when the power to this

instrument is turned on.

3.Use the VALUE ∧ and ∨ buttons to change

the setting.

4.Repeat steps 2 and 3 for the other function if

desired.

REALTIME COMMANDS

ON:

Rhythm and SEQUENCER start/stop, con-

tinue, and song position pointer data can be

transmitted/received.

128

QQTG0701

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Part XI

MIDI

Common Setting

Set the functions which are common to all parts.

1.On the MIDI MENU display, select COMMON

SETTING.

• The display looks similar to the following.

PREVIOUS TECH:

Program change numbers are standardized

among non-NX SOUND Technics models

which are set to this mode. The program

change number assigned to a given sound

on one model is assigned to the same

sound on all models which are set to the

same mode.

MAP R:

GS basic sounds are transmitted and

received as GS program change numbers.

MAP Y:

2.Use L and M buttons to select the item.

XG basic sounds are transmitted and

received as XG program change numbers.

∗GS is a trademark of Roland Corporation. XG is a

trademark of Yamaha Corporation.

NOTE ONLY:

Of the performance data, specify whether or

not only note data is exchanged.

DRUMS TYPE

PROGRAM CHANGE TO P. MEM:

NX SOUND:

Enable or disable the exchange of program

change numbers for the RIGHT 1 part by

operation of the PANEL MEMORY buttons.

• For this setting, the PANEL MEMORY 1 to 8 program

change numbers correspond to the bank numbers as fol-

lows:

Keyboard percussion instrument sounds

correspond to the same key note numbers

for connected NX SOUND Technics models

that are set to this type.

PREVIOUS TECH:

BANK A = 0 to 7

BANK B = 8 to 15 ...

Keyboard percussion instrument sounds

correspond to the same key note numbers

for connected non-NX SOUND Technics

models that are set to this type.

INTRO, FILL IN, ENDING:

Enable or disable the exchange of intro, fill-in

and ending data.

SONG SELECT

ON:

APC CONTROL:

Song number data can be exchanged.

OFF:

Enable the exchange of data for the on/off sta-

tus of the AUTO PLAY CHORD’s BASIC,

ADVANCED and PIANIST modes.

Song number data cannot be exchanged.

PREVIOUS MODEL MODE

ON:

FADE IN/OUT:

Specify whether or not FADE IN/OUT data is

exchanged.

INTRO, FILL IN, ENDING and APC CON-

TROL, FADE IN/OUT data are converted to

CONTROL CHANGE data for previous

models ∗ and then transmitted.

OFF:

PROGRAM CHANGE MODE

NX SOUND:

Program change numbers are standardized

among NX SOUND Technics models which

are set to this mode. The program change

number assigned to a given sound on one

model is assigned to the same sound on all

models which are set to the same mode.

The above settings are not converted.

∗ “Previous models” include all Technics instrument

models except for:

KN7000/6500/6000/2600/2400

PR604/804/603/703/903/1000

3.Use ∧ and ∨ buttons to change the setting.

4.Repeat steps 2 and 3 for the other settings as

desired.

129

QQTG0701

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Part XI

MIDI

Mode Setting

Initialize the settings for when the NX SOUND or GM LEVEL 2 mode is ON.

1.On the MIDI MENU display, select MODE

SETTING.

• The display looks similar to the following.

2.Select the mode.

• There are two modes for GM LEVEL 2 depending on the

parts to use.

• The confirmation display appears. Press the YES button

to execute the function, or press the NO button to cancel

the function.

Input/output Setting

Make the settings which determine how various performance data is treated during data transmission and

reception.

•

^{Select VELOCITY OFFSET VALUE. Use the}∧ ^and

1.On the MIDI MENU display, select

INPUT/OUTPUT SETTING.

• The display looks similar to the following.

∨ ^{buttons to change the value.}

All the values are offset from the current value by the

fixed amount.

The upper (127) and lower (1) limits cannot be

exceeded.

FIX:

The VELOCITY value of all received NOTE

ON data is set to a fixed value. (1 to 127)

•

^{Select VELOCITY FIXED VALUE. Use the}∧ ^and∨

buttons to change the value.

TECHNI-CHORD OUTPUT

2.Use the L and M buttons to select the item.

ON: Keyboard notes generated by the

TECHNI-CHORD function are also trans-

mitted.

OFF: Only key note data of the pressed keys

is transmitted.

RIGHT 1 INPUT

CONDUCTOR:

When data for the RIGHT 1 part is received,

the CONDUCTOR determines which part it

is used for.

TRANSPOSE OUTPUT

DIRECT:

ON: The note data of the transposed notes is

transmitted.

OFF: The note data of the played keys is

transmitted.

When data for the RIGHT 1 part is received,

it is treated as RIGHT 1 data, and perform-

ance data for all parts is received on their

respective basic channels.

DRUM PATTERN OUTPUT

AUTO PLAY CHORD INPUT

ON: Data from the DRUMS part is transmitted.

OFF: Data from the DRUMS part is not trans-

mitted.

ON: Input data for the ACCOMP, BASS, APC

and CHORD parts is received.

OFF: Data for the above parts is not received.

• MIDI channels should be assigned to the above parts

before exchanging data.

AUTO PLAY CHORD OUTPUT

ON: The data for the ACCOMP and BASS

parts is transmitted.

OFF: The data for the above parts is not trans-

VELOCITY INPUT

DIRECT:

mitted.

The VELOCITY value of received NOTE

ON data is treated as is.

OFFSET:

• MIDI channels should be assigned to the above parts

before exchanging data.

The VELOCITY value of received NOTE

ON data is offset (−50 to 50).

130

QQTG0701

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Part XI

MIDI

AUTO OCTAVE SHIFT OUTPUT

ON: If the octave has been automatically

changed, the data of the transposed notes

is transmitted, depending on the sound.

OFF: The note data of the played keys is

transmitted.

3.Use the ∧ and ∨ buttons to select the setting.

4.Repeat steps 2 and 3 for each item as

desired.

MIDI Presets

Establish the optimum settings depending on how this instrument is connected to other equipment, and

on whether this instrument is used as the master or the slave.

1.On the MIDI MENU display, select MIDI PRE-

Ⅲ Storing user settings

After you change the MIDI settings, you can

store your customized settings in USER.

SETS.

• The display looks similar to the following.

1.Adjust the various MIDI settings.

2.Go to PAGE 4/4 of the MIDI PRESETS dis-

play.

• The display looks similar to the following.

2.Use the L and M buttons to select the con-

nection setup.

• The PAGE 1/4 display shows connection setups with this

instrument as the SLAVE. And the PAGE 2/4 display

shows connection setups with this instrument as the

MASTER.

• The MASTER is the instrument used to transmit data,

and the SLAVE is the instrument used to receive the

data.

• Use the buttons below the display to select WITHOUT

APC (the AUTO PLAY CHORD is not used) or WITH

APC (the performance includes AUTO PLAY CHORD).

3.Use the WITH SPLIT POINT? button to spec-

ify whether or not to also store the keyboard

split point (YES/NO).

4.Press the WRITE button.

3.Press the OK button.

Ⅲ Recalling the USER settings

1.Go to PAGE 3/4 of the MIDI PRESETS dis-

play.

• When the settings have been successfully stored, “COM-

PLETED!” appears on the display.

Notice

When an instrument such as an organ or

accordion with separate or divided keyboards

dedicated to melody and chords is used as the

master instrument, if this instrument’s split

point is set to a note below the lowest note of

the melody keyboard of the master instrument,

it is possible to produce melody notes on mul-

tiple parts by this instrument’s CONDUCTOR

2.Press the OK button.

settings.

• Assign the RIGHT 1 channel as the CHANNEL for the

melody keyboard. Assign the CHORD channel (or if

you also wish the played note to be produced,

CHORD + LEFT) as the CHANNEL for the chord key-

board.

• You will also have to specify CONDUCTOR as the

RIGHT 1 INPUT for the INPUT/OUTPUT SETTING.

131

QQTG0701

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Part XI

MIDI

Computer Connection

These settings are used to select the mode related to MIDI signal flow when a personal computer is con-

nected to the USB terminal of this instrument.

•

When connecting to a personal computer, install the USB driver on the included CD-ROM to the computer first. (Refer to the

separate manual for more information.)

1.Turn off the power to this instrument.

2.Connect a personal computer to the USB ter-

minal on the rear of this instrument.

3.Turn on the power to this instrument.

4.On the MIDI MENU display, select COM-

PUTER CONNECTION.

• The display looks similar to the following.

5.Use the ∧ and ∨ buttons to select a mode.

NORMAL:

Ordinary mode

PC as master:

The mode which is appropriate for data trans-

mission

PR as master:

The mode when this instrument is used as the

master keyboard.

PR as slave:

The mode when this instrument is used as a

slave instrument.

INTERFACE:

The mode when this instrument is used as a

connecting device between a PC with only

USB terminals and an instrument with only

MIDI terminals.

132

QQTG0701

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Initialize

This instrument has many settable functions and storable memories. However, you can return the settings

and memory to the factory-preset status.

INITIAL

1.Press the PROGRAM MENUS button to turn it

4.Use the L and M buttons to select the desired

on.

type of initialization.

• PERFORMANCE includes all the items which are listed

below it.

PROGRAM

MENUS

5.Press the OK button.

• The display changes to the confirmation display. Press

the YES button if you wish to execute the initialization.

Press the NO button if you wish to cancel the procedure.

• The display changes to the following.

• Initialization begins. When initialization is completed,

“COMPLETED!” is shown on the display and the Key-

board returns to the normal performance mode.

• The USER MIDI and FAVORITES are not initialized by

this procedure.

2.Select CONTROL.

• The display looks similar to the following.

You can also reset all the PERFORMANCE

items with the following procedure:

Turn off the power to this instrument once.

Then, while pressing the three lower left but-

tons in the RHYTHM GROUP section

(8BEAT, 16BEAT and USA) at the same time,

turn the power on again.

3.Select INITIAL.

• This display changes to the following.

Power on settings

When the POWER button of this instrument is turned on, the settings below are automatically set to

those suitable for piano performance.

Sound

GRAND PIANO (CONCERT)

CONDUCTOR

RIGHT 1

TRANSPOSE

SYNCHRO & BREAK

AUTO PLAY CHORD

All PART SETTING items for the RIGHT 1 part

PEDAL SETTING

Off

Appropriate values

SOFT

•

When you turn the power on, you can recall all the settings which were in effect at the time you turned the instrument off:

while depressing the sustain (right) pedal, turn on the power. (However, this function only works for a few tens of minutes

after the power is turned off.)

133

QQTG0701

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Connections

(on the rear panel)

MIDI

OUT

PEDAL IN

LINE OUT

AUX IN

USB

AUX IN

USB

Other instruments such as a sound generator

can be connected to this terminal, and the sound

will be output from this instrument’s speakers. To

receive monaural sound, connect the other

instrument to the R/MONO terminal. (Do not con-

nect the L terminal.)

This terminal allows connection to a personal

computer with a USB cable (commercially avail-

able type AB cable).

Used with the applications on the included CD-

ROM, you can record this instrument’s audio

sound or manage the instrument data with your

PC.

• Applications

LINE OUT

Audio Recorder:

By connecting an external high-power amplifier,

the sound can be reproduced at a high volume.

To output monaural sound, connect the external

equipment to the R/MONO terminal. (Do not con-

nect the L terminal.)

Application for Recording this instrument’s sounds and

for saving recorded digital audio files in WAV, WMA (Win-

dows Audio Format) and MP3 formats.

Song Manager:

Application for managing this instrument’s data on your

PC by means of a USB cable.

MIDI

These terminals are for connection to another

MIDI instrument. (Refer to page 125.)

(beneath the left end of keyboard)

MIC

MAX

VOLUME

MIN

PHONES

PHONES × 2

Headphones can be connected to this instru-

ment.

•

When headphones are plugged into this jack, the

speakers of this instrument are disabled.

MIC

A microphone can be connected to this instru-

ment and the sound output through the speak-

ers. Use the VOLUME control to adjust the

volume.

•

Effects such as reverb can be applied to the micro-

phone input. (Refer to page 39.)

134

QQTG0701

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Assembly

Follow the steps below to assemble your Technics piano. Make sure you are using the correct parts and

that they are in the correct direction.

•

At least 2 people are required for assembly.

To disassemble the piano, reverse the procedure.

1.Remove the packing and take the parts out of

the carton. Confirm that all the parts on the

printed list are present.

6.Secure the piano body to the stand.

Black

Screw (A)

List

(1) Insert 2 screws in the 2 rear screw holes on the under-

side of the piano body, and turn each screw 5 or 6 times.

Push the piano body forward so that the screws are fully

inserted in the cutout of the metal piece on either side

plank. (This enables you to easily position the piano body

on the stand.)

2.The following parts are in the screw kit.

Brass-colored screw............4

Black screw (A) ...................4

Black screw (B) ...................4

Black screw (C) ...................2

(2) Adjust the piano body so that the right and left sides

project evenly over the stand.

3.Affix the right and left side planks to the pedal

box.

Pedal cord

(3) Positioning the piano body on the stand, confirm that the

4 screws can easily be inserted.

(4) Tighten the 4 screws securely.

7.Connect the pedal cord and power cord to the

terminals.

(1) Use the 4 brass-colored screws to secure the planks.

(2) Loosen the pedal cord, stowed on the inner side of the

pedal box, and extend it.

PEDAL IN

mark

plug

4.Affix the rear panel.

• Use 2 black screws (C) and 4 black screws (B) to affix the

rear panel.

With the mark

upwards, insert

the plug fully.

(C)

(1) Plug the pedal cord and power cord into the terminals on

the rear of the piano.

(B)

(2) Remove the backing from the clamps and affix them as

shown in the figure. Secure the pedal cord to the clamps.

5.Place the piano

body on the stand.

Confirm: After assembling, check these points.

WARNING:

Avoid pinching your fin-

gers.

Note 1

Holding the piano body at

least 10 cm in from the

edge, place it on the

stand so that it does not

fall off.

•

Are any parts left over?

→ Check the assembly procedure again.

Does the piano rattle when it is rocked?

→ Make sure all the screws are securely tightened.

Is the power cord firmly inserted?

→ Check again.

Is the plug of the pedal cord inserted as far into the con-

nector terminal as it will go?

→ If it is not completely inserted, the sustain and other

Note 2

pedal functions may not work.

If the piano body is placed too far to the right or left, or to

the front or back, it will become unstable.

I When the piano has been moved or transported,

retighten the screws securely.

135

QQTG0701

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Symptoms which appear to be signs of

trouble

Phenomenon

Remedy

The buttons, keys, etc. malfunction.

• Turn off the POWER button once, then turn it on again.

If this procedure is not successful, turn off the POWER

button once. Then, while pressing the three lower left

buttons in the RHYTHM GROUP section (8BEAT,

16BEAT and USA) at the same time, turn the POWER

button on again. (Note that, in this case, all program-

mable settings, functions and memories return to their

factory-preset status.)

No sound is produced when the keys are • The MAIN VOLUME is at the minimum setting. Adjust

pressed.

the volume with the MAIN VOLUME control.

• The volumes for the selected parts are set to the mini-

mum levels. Use the balance buttons to set the vol-

umes of the relevant parts to appropriate levels. (Refer

to page 27.)

• The part is muted. (Refer to page 27.)

• The LOCAL CONTROL for a part performed on the

keyboard is set to OFF. Set the LOCAL CONTROL to

ON. (Refer to page 128.)

Only percussive instrument sounds are produced • In the SOUND GROUP section, the DRUM KITS but-

when the keyboard is played. ton is on.

The volume is very low when the keyboard is • The volume setting in the SEQUENCER contents is

played.

very low. Follow the INITIAL procedure to reset the

settings. (Refer to page 133.)

The sound you hear is different from the sound • This sometimes occurs when you play back

you selected.

SEQUENCER or COMPOSER data which was cre-

ated on a different model, or when MIDI data is

received from a connected instrument. Select the

desired sounds again.

The rhythm does not start.

• The DRUMS volume is set to the minimum level. Use

the balance buttons to set the DRUMS volume to an

appropriate level.

• A SEQUENCER PLAY button is on. When you are not

playing back the SEQUENCER performance, turn off

the SEQUENCER PLAY button.

• CLOCK is set to MIDI. Set CLOCK to INTERNAL.

(Refer to page 128.)

No sound is produced for the automatic accom- • An ACCOMP part does not sound if its corresponding

paniment, or only the sounds of some parts are volume is set to the minimum level. Use the respective

produced.

balance buttons to set the ACCOMP 1–5 volumes to

appropriate levels.

• The APC/SEQUENCER VOLUME is at the minimum

setting. Adjust the volume with the APC/SEQUENCER

VOLUME control.

Storage is not possible.

• The remaining memory capacity of the SEQUENCER

is 0. Follow the SONG CLEAR or TRACK CLEAR pro-

cedure to erase the memory. (Refer to page 72.)

The playback measure indication is different from • The number of measures corresponds to the time sig-

when the performance was recorded.

nature of the rhythm selected at the start of recording.

To change the rhythm in the middle of the song, record

the rhythm change in the RHYTHM part. (Refer to

page 69.)

136

QQTG0701

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Phenomenon

Storage is not possible.

Remedy

• The remaining memory capacity of the COMPOSER is

Setting the time signature is not possible.

• The time signature cannot be changed for a pattern

which is currently recorded in the COMPOSER. If you

wish to change the time signature, first follow the pro-

cedure to clear the memory. (Refer to page 82.)

The playback timing of the rhythm pattern is dif- • The QUANTIZE function was on when the pattern was

ferent from the timing with which it was recorded. recorded and the timing was automatically corrected.

Set the quantize level to a smaller note unit or to OFF

when recording. (Refer to page 84.)

The Disk Drive produces a noise during recording • This occurs when the Disk Drive is reading a disk. It

or playback.

does not indicate a problem.

When the procedure to load from a disk is per- • When performing the load operation from a disk, the

formed, the contents of the memory are erased.

memory changes to that of the data loaded from the

disk. If you wish to preserve a song which is stored in

the memory, save it on a disk before performing the

load procedure.

Data cannot be exchanged through MIDI termi- • Match the channels on the transmitting side and the

nals.

receiving side. (Refer to page 127.)

The sound quavers or is distorted.

• When the USB terminal or both the MIDI IN and OUT

terminals are connected to a computer, depending on

the computer software the received data may be sent

back to the instrument just as it is. Because of this the

sound generated from the keys and the sound gener-

ated from the returned data are both produced, caus-

ing undesirable effects, such as the sounds canceling

each other out, for example. In this case, either change

the software settings to prevent received data from

being returned, or set the MIDI LOCAL CONTROL to

off.

Noise from a radio or TV can be heard.

The cabinet becomes warm during use.

• This sometimes occurs when electrical equipment

such as a radio or TV is used near the instrument. Try

moving such electrical equipment further away from

the instrument.

• The sound may be coming from a nearby broadcast

station or amateur radio station. If the sound is bother-

some, consult your dealer or service center.

• This instrument has a built-in power source that heats

the cabinet to some degree. This is not an indication of

trouble.

137

QQTG0701

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Error messages

No.

Contents

No.

Contents

The data on the disk that you are

using is for a different product.

An error has occurred while the disk

was loading.

It is only possible to copy melody

tracks.

Tracks such as rhythm, chord and

control cannot be copied.

Please try again!

There is no disk in the Disk Drive.

The file that you tried to load is empty.

An error has occurred while the disk

was saving.

Please try again!

The disk that you are using is write

protected.

Please remove the write protection

and try again.

The disk that you are using is full.

Please use another disk.

This song is too long to be saved as a

MIDI file.

The MIDI file that you have tried to

load exceeds the memory capacity of

this instrument and cannot be played.

The SEQUENCER memory has been

cleared.

It is not possible to change the time

signature of a COMPOSER pattern

after it has been recorded.

If you want to proceed, you must first

clear the entire COMPOSER pattern.

The time signature of the pattern from

which you are copying is different from

the COMPOSER memory that you are

using.

Either:Change the time signature of

the COMPOSER memory

An error has occurred while the disk

was formatting. The disk that you are

using may be faulty.

Please try formatting another disk.

The data is already copy protected.

or:Copy from a pattern that has the

same time signature

The song you are trying to save is

empty.

Memory full

Select a Track before setting parame-

ters for AUTO PUNCH RECORD.

This STANDARD MIDI FILE is incom-

patible with this instrument and cannot

be loaded.

This is not a STANDARD MIDI FILE.

The timebase (PPQ resolution) that

The file that you are trying to load was

saved on a previous model. It is only

possible to load using the “PERFOR-

MANCE” option.

It is impossible to edit a Drum Kit.

Please select a different sound from

any group except Keyboard Percus-

sion.

you

tried

load

not

24/48/96/192/288/384 PPQ.

A problem has occurred with your

SEQUENCER Data.

This might be due to a damaged or

faulty disk.

It is only possible to insert MELODY

Tracks. Tracks such as RHYTHM,

CHORD and CONTROL cannot be

inserted.

This procedure is not possible with a

composer pattern or the metronome.

Please select a preset rhythm pattern.

It is not possible to record using preset

banks, compile banks, or control

banks. Please select one of the user

banks.

Special tracks such as CHORD

(APC), RHY and CTL exist in the song

from which you are copying and are

incompatible with the destination song

because it is in the GM mode.

Memory full

It is necessary to press REC STOP to

complete this procedure.

It is impossible to change the time sig-

nature because it has already been

set in the existing tracks.

A rhythm track already exists. It is

impossible to assign two tracks to

rhythm.

It is only possible to change the veloc-

ity on a melody track.

It is only possible to merge melody

tracks.

Tracks such as rhythm, chord and

control cannot be merged.

138

QQTG0701

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

No.

Contents

AUTO PUNCH recording has been

unsuccessful because SEQUENCER

operation was interrupted before the

PUNCH OUT measure was reached.

The song that you have tried to load

exceeds this instrument’s available

memory and cannot be loaded. The

selected song memory has been

cleared.

The computer connection is not active

because the computer port switch is

set to MIDI. Please turn the power off,

set the switch to the desired setting

and turn the power back on.

Please select the Panel Memory that

you want to name.

It is not possible to use the CHORD

FINDER in this mode. Please select

CHORD FINDER from HOME page or

CHORD STEP RECORD page.

SOLO pads are special pads which

include Chord information. Pleases

use SOLO pads when the rhythm and

accompaniment is playing.

There are no APC or CHORD tracks.

Select and APC track or CHORD

track, and try again.

It is not possible to record directly into

the SOLO pads. Record on the

SEQUENCER and Copy the melody

and chord information into a SOLO

pad.

It is not possible to delete all mea-

sures.

It is not possible to insert over 16 mea-

sures in a PATTERN.

It is not possible to set the start mea-

sure to the measures you set to copy.

139

QQTG0701

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Index

MASTER TUNING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106

MEMORY, RHYTHM GROUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85

MEMORY, SOUND GROUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119

MIC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134

MIDI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125

MIDI PRESETS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131

MIDI SETTING LOAD OPTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124

MIXER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104

MULTI EFFECT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

Music stand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

MUSIC STYLE ARRANGER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51

MUTE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

ADVANCED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45

APC/SEQUENCER VOLUME. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46, 62

AUTO PLAY CHORD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44

BACKUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90

BANK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

BASIC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44

BEAT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42

BRILLIANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38

CHORD FINDER. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47

CHORD STEP RECORD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

CHORUS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38

CLOCK (MIDI). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128

COMPOSER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80

COMPUTER CONNECTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132

CONDUCTOR. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34

CONTRAST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29

CONTROL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120

COUNT INTRO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

CUSTOMIZE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122

NOTE EDIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73

ONE TOUCH PLAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49

OTHER PARTS/TR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

PAGE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28

PAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104

PANEL MEMORY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

PART SETTING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102

PEDAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120

PERFORMANCE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90

PIANIST. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45

PIANO STYLIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

PROGRESSIVE PIANIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

PUNCH RECORD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64

DEMO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

DIGITAL DRAWBAR. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32

DIGITAL EFFECT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

DIRECT PLAY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95

Disk Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90

DISK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91

Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

DISPLAY TIME OUT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123

DISPLAY HOLD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29

DRUM EDIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74

QUANTIZE, COMPOSER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84

QUANTIZE, SEQUENCER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71

REALTIME RECORD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59

REVERB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38

RHYTHM GROUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

EASY COMPOSER. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81

EASY EDIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110

EASY REC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58

Error messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138

EXIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28

SAVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97

SET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

SEQUENCER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54

SEQUENCER PLAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61

SEQUENCER RESET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61

SEQUENCER SONG SAVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98

SIMPLE PIANO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

SOUND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101

SOUND ARRANGER. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49

SOUND EXPLORER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32

SOUND EDIT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109

SOUND GROUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141

SPLIT POINT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35

Standard MIDI File. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91

START/STOP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42

STEP RECORD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65

SYNCHRO & BREAK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42

FADE IN/OUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48

FAVORITES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30

FILL IN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

FILTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114

FINGERED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45

GENERAL MIDI LEVEL 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91

GLIDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121

Headphones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134

HELP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29

INITIAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133

INTRO & ENDING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

TAP TEMPO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42

TECHNI-CHORD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40

TEMPO/PROGRAM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42

TONE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110

TOUCH SENSITIVITY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36

TRANSPOSE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39

Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136

KEY SCALING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106

KEY SHIFT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102

LANGUAGE SELECT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29

LEFT HOLD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

LFO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117

LINE OUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134

LOAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93

LOCAL (MIDI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128

USB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134

VARIATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42

Volume balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

MAIN VOLUME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

140

QQTG0701

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Specifications

SX-PR54/M

KEYBOARD

88 KEYS

SOUND GENERATOR

MAX. POLYPHONY

PCM

64 NOTES

NUMBER OF SOUNDS 1025 SOUNDS (990 SOUNDS +2 ORGAN DRAWBARS + 33 DRUM KITS)

PIANO GROUP

SOUND GROUP

GRAND, UPRIGHT, ELECTRIC, MODERN

STRINGS, VOCAL, GUITAR & HARPSI, BRASS, SAX & WOODWIND,

ORGAN & ACCORDION, SYNTH, BASS, MALLET & ORCH PERC,

WORLD, PIANO MIXTURES, ORCH MIXTURES, DIGITAL DRAWBARS,

DRUM KITS, SOUND EXPLORER

SIMPLE PIANO

ࠗ

FAVORITES

ࠗ

PEDAL

DAMPER × 1, PROGRAMMABLE (SOFT) × 1

ࠗ

PROGRESSIVE PIANIST

TOUCH SENSITIVITY

EFFECT

ࠗ

DIGITAL EFFECT, MULTI EFFECT, REVERB, CHORUS, BRILLIANCE

RIGHT 1, RIGHT 2, LEFT

CONDUCTOR

TRANSPOSE

12 NOTES

NUMBER OF

RHYTHMS

128 RHYTHMS × 4 VARIATIONS

POP, ROCK, FUNK & SOUL, DISCO, POP BALLAD, BALLAD,

BALLROOM & SHOW, 8BEAT, 16BEAT, USA, WALTZ & TRAD,

JAZZ & SWING, LATIN & WORLD

RHYTHM GROUP

METRONOME

CONTROLS

ࠗ

MAIN VOLUME, APC/SEQUENCER VOLUME, BALANCE, MUTE,

START/STOP, INTRO & ENDING 1, INTRO & ENDING 2, FILL IN 1,

FILL IN 2, COUNT INTRO, SYNCHRO & BREAK, TEMPO/PROGRAM,

TAP TEMPO, FADE IN/OUT, SPLIT POINT

AUTO PLAY CHORD

MODE: BASIC, ADVANCED 1, ADVANCED 2, PIANIST

MEMORY, ON BASS, CHORD FINDER, LEFT HOLD

MUSIC STYLE ARRANGER

SOUND ARRANGER

PIANO STYLIST

ࠗ

ONE TOUCH PLAY

TECHNI-CHORD

ࠗ

PANEL MEMORY

SEQUENCER

3 BANKS × 8

16 TRACKS

RESOLUTION: 1/96 PER BEAT

STORAGE CAPACITY: APPROX. 40000 NOTES (10 SONGS MAX.)

INPUT MODES: EASY RECORD, REALTIME RECORD, STEP RECORD

FUNCTIONS: RECORD & EDIT, COPY & PASTE, RANGE EDIT

COMPOSER

8 PARTS: BASS, ACCOMP 1 – 5, DRUMS 1, 2

STORAGE CAPACITY: APPROX. 13000 NOTES

INPUT MODES: REALTIME RECORD, STEP RECORD

FUNCTIONS: EASY COMPOSER, PATTERN COPY,

SEQ TO COMPOSER COPY, LOAD SINGLE COMPOSER

MEMORY: 3 BANKS

DISK

3.5 inch DISK DRIVE for 2HD (1.44MB), 2DD (720KB)

LOAD, SAVE, DIRECT PLAY, SONG MEDLEY, DISK TOOLS,

PREFERENCES

SOUND

PART SETTING, MIXER, MASTAR TUNING, KEY SCALING,

APC REVERB SETTING, TECHNI-CHORD, SOUND LOAD OPTION,

SOUND ARRANGER

141

QQTG0701

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

SX-PR54/M

REVERB & EFFECT

CUSTOMIZE

MIC REVERB & EFFECT, TONE CONTROL, REVERB, CHORUS, MULTI,

SOUND LOAD OPTION, MIXER

DISPLAY TIMEOUT, DATA PROTECTION, FAVORITES SETTING, MIDI

SETTING LOAD OPTION, LANGUAGE SETTING, DISK PREFERENCES

CONTROL

INITIAL, PEDAL SETTING, PANEL MEMORY MODE,

MUSIC STYLE ARRANGER MODE, FADE IN/OUT SETTING

SOUND EDIT

EASY EDIT, TONE, PITCH, FILTER, AMPLITUDE, LFO, EFFECT,

CONTROLLER

MEMORY: 40, 1 USER DRUM KIT

MIDI

PART SETTING, CONTROL MESSAGES, REALTIME MESSAGES,

COMMON SETTING, INPUT/OUTPUT SETTING, MIDI PRESETS,

MODE SETTING, COMPUTER CONNECTION

DISPLAY

HELP

LCD: PAGE, CONTRAST, EXIT, DISPLAY HOLD, OTHER PARTS/TR

ࠗ

DEMO

TERMINALS

PHONES × 2, LINE OUT (R/MONO,L), AUX IN (R/MONO,L), USB,

MIDI (IN, OUT), PEDAL IN, MIC (VOLUME)

OUTPUT

80 W (40 W × 2)

SPEAKERS

14 cm × 2

POWER REQUIREMENT

110 W

AC120/220/230–240V 50/60 Hz

AC120V 60 Hz (NORTH AMERICA AND MEXICO)

AC230–240V 50/60 Hz (EUROPE, AUSTRALIA AND NEW ZEALAND)

DIMENSIONS (W × H × D)

NET WEIGHT

139.7 cm × 104.2 cm × 60.1 cm (55 × 41-1/32" × 23-21/32")

55 kg (121.3 lbs)

ACCESSORIES

AC CORD, MUSIC STAND,

CD-ROM (AUDIO RECORDER, SONG MANAGER, USB DRIVER,

PROGRESSIVE PIANIST MUSIC SCORE)

• Design and specifications are subject to change without notice.

• In some markets, some models may not be available.

142

QQTG0701

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Part XI

MIDI

The following kinds of data can be transmitted/received.

Ⅲ NOTE data

Ⅲ PROGRAM CHANGE

This is the most basic kind of MIDI data which is

exchanged, and is used to specify which keys

are played and how hard they are played.

This is sound change data. When a different

sound is selected on the transmitting instrument,

the sound on the receiving instrument also

changes.

NOTE NUMBER: Number specifying which key

is played.

NOTE ON: Specifies that a key is played.

NOTE OFF: Specifies that a key is released.

VELOCITY: Specifies how hard a key is struck.

Ⅲ CONTROL CHANGE

These are volume, sustain, effect, etc. data used

to enhance performance expression. Each func-

tion is distinguished by its control number, and

the function which can be changed by the control

differs depending on the instrument.

• MIDI notes are assigned numbers from 0 to 127, with

middle C (C3) as 60. Note pitches are in semitone incre-

ments, with the higher numbers assigned to the higher

pitches.

Ⅲ EXCLUSIVE data

This is data that is specific to this instrument, and

data for the GENERAL MIDI LEVEL 2 mode set-

ting.

Outline of MIDI functions

AUTO PLA

CHORD

ONE TOUCH

APC/SEQUENCER

VOLUME

FADE

RHYTHM GROUP

TEMPO

PROGRAM

SOUND GROUP

SEQUENCER

SPLIT

SOUND

FUNK

BALLROOM

SHOW

GUITAR

SAX

ORGAN

SOUND

EASY

PROGRAM

MENUS

DISK

MAIN

POINT

MODE

OFF/ON

PLAY

OUT ARRANGER

ROCK

SOUL

DISCO POP BALLAD BALLAD

STRINGS VOCAL HARPSI BRASS WOODWIND ACCORDION SYNTH EXPLORER

PLAY

REC

VORITES

DISK

LOAD

VOLUME

MAX

SET

CHORD FINDER

CHORD STEP REC

WALTZ

TRAD SWING WORLD MEMORY

JAZZ

LATIN

MALLET

PIANO

ORCH

DIGITAL

CONDUCTOR

RIGHT

DIGITAL

EFFECT

MULTI

EFFECT CHORUS REVERB

PROGRESSIVE

PIANIST

BEAT

16 BEAT

USA

BASS ORCH PERC WORLD MIXTURES MIXTURES DRAWBARS DRUM KITS MEMORY

LEFT

RIGHT

PIANO STYLIST

CONTRAST

OFF

MIN

P. M E M 5 - 8

LOAD

BEAT

MUSIC STYLE ARRANGER

VARIATION

FILL IN

INTRO

ENDING

SYNCHRO

BREAK

START

STOP

TAP TEMPO

TRANSPOSE

PARTS/TR

DISPLAY

HOLD EXIT

GRAND UPRIGHT ELECTRIC MODERN

SIMPLE PIANO

TECHNI-CHORD

BANK

SET

DEMO

MUTE

PAGE

SEQUENCER COUNT

RESET INTRO

PIANO

PANEL MEMORY

1.Press the PROGRAM MENUS button to turn it

3.Select a function.

on.

4.Follow the procedure to adjust the settings.

• While you are adjusting the settings, when the

TEMPO/PROGRAM indicator is lit, it indicates that the

TEMPO/PROGRAM is available for setting the current

function.

• The display looks similar to the following.

5.When you have finished setting the functions,

press the PROGRAM MENUS button to turn it

off.

2.Select MIDI.

• The display looks similar to the following.

126

QQTG0701

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

(For U.S.A.)

PANASONIC CONSUMER ELECTRONICS COMPANY,

DIVISION OF MATSUSHITA ELECTRIC CORPORATION OF AMERICA

One Panasonic Way, Secaucus, New Jersey 07094

PANASONIC SALES COMPANY, DIVISION OF MATSUSHITA ELECTRIC

OF PUERTO RICO, INC.,

Ave. 65 de Infanteria, Km. 9.5

San Gabriel Industrial Park, Carolina, Puerto Rico 00985

Musical Instrument

Products Limited Warranty

Limited Warranty Coverage

In-Home service, if applicable, requires clear, complete and easy access to the product by the

authorized servicer and does not include removal or re-installation of an installed product. It is possible

that certain in-home repairs will not be completed in-home, but will require that the product, or parts of

the product, be removed for shop diagnosis and/or repair and then returned.

If your product does not work properly because of a defect in materials or workmanship, Panasonic

Consumer Electronics Company or Panasonic Sales Company (collectively referred to as “the

warrantor”) will, for the length of the period indicated on the chart below, which starts with the date of

original purchase (“warranty period”), at its option either (a) repair your product with new or refurbished

parts, or (b) replace it with a new or a refurbished product. The decision to repair or replace will be

made by the warrantor.

Limited Warranty Limits And Exclusions

This warranty ONLY COVERS failures due to defects in materials or workmanship, and DOES NOT

COVER normal wear and tear or cosmetic damage. The warranty ALSO DOES NOT COVER damages

which occurred in shipment, or failures which are caused by products not supplied by the warrantor, or

failures which result from accidents, misuse, abuse, neglect, mishandling, misapplication, alteration,

faulty installation, set-up adjustments, misadjustment of consumer controls, improper maintenance,

power line surge, lightning damage, modification, rental use of the product, service by anyone other

than a Factory Servicenter or other Authorized Servicer, or damage that is attributable to acts of God.

Product

Organs, Digital Pianos,

Digital Ensemble Series, Tone Cabinets,

Panasonic Digital Pianos

Parts

Labor

Service

Three (3) Years

One (1) Year

In-Home or Carry-In

Keyboards

One (1) Year

In-Home or Carry-In

Carry-In or Mail-In

Panasonic Keyboards, Synthesizers,

Sound Modules, Expansion Boards,

Disk Drives, Drum Percussion Units,

MIDI Orchestra, Keyboard Amplifiers,

Foot Pedals, Foot Controllers,

THERE ARE NO EXPRESS WARRANTIES EXCEPT AS LISTED UNDER “LIMITED WARRANTY

COVERAGE”. THE WARRANTOR IS NOT LIABLE FOR INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL

DAMAGES RESULTING FROM THE USE OF THIS PRODUCT, OR ARISING OUT OF ANY BREACH

OF THIS WARRANTY, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION, LOSS OF GOODWILL, PROFITS OR

REVENUE, LOSS OF USE OF THIS PRODUCT OR ANY ASSOCIATED EQUIPMENT, COST OF

SUBSTITUTE EQUIPMENT, DOWNTIME COSTS, OR CLAIMS OF ANY PARTY DEALING WITH

BUYER FOR SUCH DAMAGES. (As examples, this excludes damages for lost time, cost of having

someone remove or re-install an installed unit if applicable, travel to and from the servicer, loss of

media, data or other memory content. The items listed are not exclusive, but are for illustration only.)

ALL EXPRESS AND IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING THE WARRANTY OF

Personal Music PA Systems

USB Reader/Writer, Personal Computer

Card Adapters (in exchange for defective

item)

One (1) Year

Not Applicable

Carry-In or Mail-In

SD Memory Cards (in exchange for

defective item)

Ninety (90) Days Not Applicable

MERCHANTABILITY, ARE LIMITED TO THE PERIOD OF THE LIMITED WARRANTY.

During the “Labor” warranty period there will be no charge for labor. During the “Parts” warranty period,

there will be no charge for parts. You must carry-in or mail-in your product or arrange for in-home

service, as applicable, during the warranty period. If non-rechargeable batteries are included, they are

not warranted. This warranty only applies to products purchased and serviced in the United States or

Puerto Rico. This warranty is extended only to the original purchaser of a new product which was not

sold “as is”. A purchase receipt or other proof of the original purchase date is required for warranty

service.

Some states do not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or consequential damages, or

limitations on how long an implied warranty lasts, so the exclusions may not apply to you.

This warranty gives you specific legal rights and you may also have others rights which vary from state

to state. If a problem with this product develops during or after the warranty period, you may contact

your dealer or Servicenter. If the problem is not handled to your satisfaction, then write to the

warrantor's Consumer Affairs Department at the addresses listed for the warrantor.

Carry-In, Mail-In or In-Home Service

For Carry-In, Mail-In or In-Home Service (as applicable) in the United States call 1-800-211-

PANA(7262) or visit the website (http://www.panasonic.com).

PARTS AND SERVICE (INCLUDING COST OF AN IN-HOME SERVICE CALL IF APPLICABLE)

WHICH ARE NOT COVERED BY THIS LIMITED WARRANTY ARE YOUR RESPONSIBILITY.

For assistance in Puerto Rico call Panasonic Sales Company (787)-750-4300 or fax (787)-768-2910.

Customer Services Directory

143

QQTG0701

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Matsushita Electric Industrial Co., Ltd.

Web Site: http://www.panasonic.co.jp/global/

Printed in Japan

QQTG0701

Se0503S0

ENGLISH

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Toastmaster Oven XO 1MSS User Manual
Toshiba Printer B 450 R User Manual
TP Link Network Card TL WN321G User Manual
Uniden Cell Phone TCX950 User Manual
Universal Security Instruments Smoke Alarm SS 795 User Manual
Victory Refrigeration Refrigerator VUR 60 8 User Manual
Vivitek Projection Television du6871 User Manual
Vivotek Digital Camera FD7132 User Manual
Vizualogic Car Video System A 1000 User Manual
Weber Gas Grill 2000 LX User Manual